AD9920ABBCZ [ADI]

12-Bit CCD Signal Processor with V-Driver and Precision Timing Generator; 12位CCD信号处理器, V型驱动器和精确定时发生器
AD9920ABBCZ
型号: AD9920ABBCZ
厂家: ADI    ADI
描述:

12-Bit CCD Signal Processor with V-Driver and Precision Timing Generator
12位CCD信号处理器, V型驱动器和精确定时发生器

驱动器 消费电路 商用集成电路 CD
文件: 总112页 (文件大小:1187K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
12-Bit CCD Signal Processor with V-Driver  
and Precision Timing Generator  
AD9920A  
FEATURES  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
Integrated 19-channel V-driver  
1.8 V AFETG core  
24 programmable vertical clock signals  
The AD9920A is a highly integrated charge-coupled device (CCD)  
signal processor for digital still camera applications. It includes a  
complete analog front end (AFE) with analog-to-digital conversion,  
Correlated double sampler (CDS) with −3 dB, 0 dB,  
+3 dB, and +6 dB gain  
12-bit, 40.5 MHz analog-to-digital converter (ADC)  
Black level clamp with variable level control  
Complete on-chip timing generator  
Precision Timing core with ~400 ps resolution  
On-chip 3 V horizontal and RG drivers  
General-purpose outputs (GPOs) for shutter and  
system support  
On-chip sync generator with external sync input  
On-chip 1.8 V low dropout (LDO) regulator  
105-ball, 8 mm × 8 mm CSP_BGA package  
combined with a full-function programmable timing generator  
and 19-channel vertical driver (V-driver). The timing generator  
is capable of supporting up to 24 vertical clock signals to control  
advanced CCDs. The on-chip V-driver supports up to 19 channels  
for use with six-field CCDs. A Precision Timing® core allows adjust-  
ment of high speed clocks with approximately 400 ps resolution  
at 40.5 MHz operation. The AD9920A also contains six GPOs  
that can be used for shutter and system functions.  
The analog front end includes black level clamping, variable  
gain CDS, and a 12-bit ADC. The timing generator provides all  
the necessary CCD clocks: RG, H-clocks, V-clocks, sensor gate  
pulses, substrate clock, and substrate bias control.  
APPLICATIONS  
The AD9920A is specified over an operating temperature range  
of −25°C to +85°C.  
Digital still cameras  
FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM  
REFT REFB  
AD9920A  
–3dB, 0dB, +3dB, +6dB  
CDS  
VREF  
12  
12-BIT  
ADC  
VGA  
CCDIN  
D0 TO D11  
DCLK  
6dB TO 42dB  
CLAMP  
LDOIN  
LDO  
REG  
LDOOUT  
INTERNAL CLOCKS  
RG  
HL  
PRECISION  
TIMING  
GENERATOR  
HORIZONTAL  
DRIVERS  
SL  
8
INTERNAL  
REGISTERS  
SCK  
H1 TO H8  
XV1 TO XV24  
SDATA  
19  
V1A TO V6 (3-LEVEL)  
V7 TO V16 (2-LEVEL)  
VERTICAL  
24  
GPO5  
GPO6  
VERTICAL  
DRIVER  
TIMING  
SYNC  
GENERATOR  
CONTROL  
SUBCK  
6
XSUBCK  
XSUBCNT  
GPO1 TO GPO4,  
GPO7, GPO8  
HD  
VD  
CLI CLO  
SYNC/RST  
Figure 1.  
Rev. B  
Information furnished by Analog Devices is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, no  
responsibility is assumed by Analog Devices for its use, nor for any infringements of patents or other  
rights of third parties that may result from its use. Specifications subject to change without notice. No  
license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of Analog Devices.  
Trademarks and registeredtrademarks arethe property of their respective owners.  
One Technology Way, P.O. Box 9106, Norwood, MA 02062-9106, U.S.A.  
Tel: 781.329.4700 www.analog.com  
Fax: 781.461.3113 ©2009–2010 Analog Devices, Inc. All rights reserved.  
 
AD9920A  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
Features .............................................................................................. 1  
V-Driver Slew Rate Control...................................................... 60  
Shutter Timing Control............................................................. 60  
Substrate Clock Operation (SUBCK)...................................... 60  
Field Counters............................................................................. 63  
General-Purpose Outputs (GPOs) .......................................... 64  
GP Lookup Table (LUT)............................................................ 68  
Applications....................................................................................... 1  
General Description......................................................................... 1  
Functional Block Diagram .............................................................. 1  
Revision History ............................................................................... 3  
Specifications..................................................................................... 4  
Digital Specifications ................................................................... 5  
Analog Specifications................................................................... 5  
Timing Specifications .................................................................. 7  
Vertical Driver Specifications ..................................................... 8  
Absolute Maximum Ratings.......................................................... 10  
Thermal Resistance .................................................................... 10  
ESD Caution................................................................................ 10  
Pin Configuration and Function Descriptions........................... 11  
Typical Performance Characteristics ........................................... 14  
Equivalent Circuits......................................................................... 15  
Terminology .................................................................................... 16  
Theory of Operation ...................................................................... 17  
H-Counter Behavior in Slave Mode......................................... 17  
High Speed Precision Timing Core........................................... 18  
Digital Data Outputs.................................................................. 22  
Horizontal Clamping and Blanking......................................... 23  
Horizontal Timing Sequence Example.................................... 30  
Vertical Timing Generation...................................................... 32  
Vertical Sequences (VSEQ)....................................................... 34  
Vertical Timing Example........................................................... 51  
Internal Vertical Driver Connections (18-Channel Mode).. 53  
Internal Vertical Driver Connections (19-Channel Mode).. 54  
Complete Exposure/Readout Operation Using Primary  
Counter and GPO Signals......................................................... 69  
SG Control Using GPO ............................................................. 71  
Manual Shutter Operation Using Enhanced SYNC Modes.. 73  
Analog Front End Description and Operation ...................... 77  
Applications Information.............................................................. 79  
Power-Up Sequence for Master Mode..................................... 79  
Power-Up Sequence for Slave Mode........................................ 81  
Power-Down Sequence for Master and Slave Modes............ 83  
Additional Restrictions in Slave Mode.................................... 84  
Vertical Toggle Position Placement Near Counter Reset...... 85  
Standby Mode Operation.......................................................... 86  
CLI Frequency Change.............................................................. 86  
Circuit Layout Information........................................................... 88  
Typical 3 V System ..................................................................... 88  
External Crystal Application .................................................... 88  
Circuit Configurations .............................................................. 89  
Serial Interface ................................................................................ 93  
Serial Interface Timing.............................................................. 93  
Layout of Internal Registers...................................................... 94  
Updating New Register Values ................................................. 95  
Complete Register Listing ............................................................. 96  
Outline Dimensions..................................................................... 112  
Ordering Guide ........................................................................ 112  
Output Polarity of Vertical Transfer Clocks and Substrate  
Clock ............................................................................................ 55  
Rev. B | Page 2 of 112  
AD9920A  
REVISION HISTORY  
6/10—Rev. A to Rev. B  
Changes to Figure 96 ......................................................................75  
Changes to Figure 100 ....................................................................77  
Changes to Figure 102 ....................................................................80  
Changes to Power-Up Sequence for Slave Mode Section..........81  
Changes to Figure 103 ....................................................................82  
Changes to Power-Down Sequence for Master and  
Slave Modes Section........................................................................83  
Added Table 48; Renumbered Tables Sequentially.....................86  
Changes to Figure 108 ....................................................................88  
Changes to Figure 109 ....................................................................89  
Changes to Figure 110 ....................................................................90  
Changes to Figure 111 ....................................................................91  
Changes to Figure 112 ....................................................................92  
Changes to Layout of Internal Registers Section  
Changes to Figure 1...........................................................................1  
Changes to Figure 9, Figure 10, Figure 12, and Figure 13 .........15  
Moved Terminology Section..........................................................16  
Changes to Figure 15 ......................................................................17  
Moved Generating HBLK Line Alternation Section..................24  
Moved Figure 32..............................................................................25  
Moved Figure 33..............................................................................27  
Changes to Vertical Sequences (VSEQ) Section .........................34  
Changes to Special Vertical Sequence Alternation  
(SVSA) Mode Section.....................................................................38  
Added Table 18; Renumbered Tables Sequentially.....................44  
Deleted Figure 77; Renumbered Figures Sequentially ...............61  
Changes to SUBCK Low Speed Operation Section  
and Table 43 .....................................................................................61  
Changes to Figure 81 ......................................................................62  
Changes to Table 45 ........................................................................64  
Changes to Scheduled Toggles Section and Figure 85 ...............66  
Changes to Figure 86, ShotTimer Sequences Section,  
and Figure 115 .................................................................................94  
Changes to Table 53 ........................................................................97  
Changes to Table 57 ........................................................................99  
Changes to Table 59 ......................................................................101  
Changes to Table 61 ......................................................................105  
Changes to Table 63 ......................................................................108  
Updated Outline Dimensions......................................................112  
and Figure 87 ...................................................................................67  
Changes to Complete Exposure/Readout Operation  
Using Primary Counter and GPO Signals Section .....................69  
Changes to Triggered Control of GPO5 Section.........................71  
6/09—Revision A: Initial Version  
Rev. B | Page 3 of 112  
 
AD9920A  
SPECIFICATIONS  
Table 1.  
Parameter  
Test Conditions/Comments  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
TEMPERATURE RANGE  
Operating  
Storage  
−25  
−65  
+85  
+150  
°C  
°C  
POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE INPUTS  
AVDD  
TCVDD  
CLIVDD  
RGVDD  
HVDD1 and HVDD2  
DVDD  
DRVDD  
IOVDD  
AFE analog supply  
Timing core supply  
CLI input supply  
RG, HL driver supply  
H1 to H8 driver supplies  
Digital logic supply  
Parallel data output driver supply  
Digital I/O supply  
1.6  
1.6  
1.6  
2.1  
2.1  
1.6  
1.6  
1.6  
1.8  
1.8  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
1.8  
3.0  
3.0  
2.0  
2.0  
3.6  
3.6  
3.6  
2.0  
3.6  
3.6  
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V-DRIVER POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGES  
VDVDD  
VH1, VH2  
VL1, VL2  
VM1, VM2  
VLL  
VH1, VH2 to VL1, VL2, VLL  
VMM1  
LDO2  
LDOIN  
Output Voltage  
Output Current  
V-driver/logic supply  
V-driver high supply  
V-driver low supply  
V-driver midsupply  
SUBCK low supply  
1.6  
3.0  
3.6  
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
11.0  
−8.5  
−1.5  
−11.0  
15.0  
−7.5  
0.0  
16.5  
−5.5  
+1.5  
−5.5  
23.5  
VDVDD  
−7.5  
SUBCK midsupply  
LDO supply input  
VLL  
0.0  
2.5  
1.8  
60  
3.0  
1.9  
100  
3.6  
2.05  
V
V
mA  
POWER SUPPLY CURRENTS—40.5 MHz  
OPERATION  
AVDD  
TCVDD  
CLIVDD  
RGVDD  
HVDD1 and HVDD23  
DVDD  
DRVDD  
1.8 V  
1.8 V  
3 V  
27  
5
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
1.5  
10  
59  
9.5  
6
3.3 V, 20 pF RG load, 20 pF HL load  
3.3 V, 480 pF total load on H1 to H8  
1.8 V  
3 V, 10 pF load on each data output pin  
(D0 to D11)  
IOVDD  
3 V, depends on load and output  
frequency of digital I/O  
2
mA  
POWER SUPPLY CURRENTS—STANDBY  
MODE OPERATION  
Standby1 Mode  
Standby2 Mode  
20  
5
mA  
mA  
Standby3 Mode  
1.5  
mA  
MAXIMUM CLOCK RATE (CLI)  
MINIMUM CLOCK RATE (CLI)  
40.5  
MHz  
MHz  
10  
1 VMM must be greater than VLL and less than VDVDD.  
2 LDO should be used only for the AD9920A 1.8 V supplies, not for external circuitry.  
3 The total power dissipated by the HVDD (or RGVDD) can be approximated using the following equation:  
Total HVDD Power = (CL × HVDD × Pixel Frequency) × HVDD  
Rev. B | Page 4 of 112  
 
AD9920A  
DIGITAL SPECIFICATIONS  
IOVDD = 1.6 V to 3.6 V, RGVDD = HVDD1 and HVDD2 = 2.7 V to 3.6 V, CL = 20 pF, TMIN to TMAX, unless otherwise noted.  
Table 2.  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Test Conditions/Comments Min  
VDD − 0.6  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
LOGIC INPUTS (IOVDD)  
High Level Input Voltage  
Low Level Input Voltage  
High Level Input Current  
Low Level Input Current  
Input Capacitance  
VIH  
VIL  
IIH  
IIL  
CIN  
V
V
μA  
μA  
pF  
0.6  
10  
10  
10  
LOGIC OUTPUTS (IOVDD, DRVDD)  
High Level Output Voltage  
Low Level Output Voltage  
VOH  
VOL  
IOH = 2 mA  
IOL = 2 mA  
VDD − 0.5  
VDD − 0.5  
V
V
0.5  
0.5  
RG and H-DRIVER OUTPUTS (HVDD1,  
HVDD2, and RGVDD)  
High Level Output Voltage  
Low Level Output Voltage  
Maximum H1 to H8 Output Current  
Maximum HL and RG Output Current  
Maximum Load Capacitance  
CLI INPUT  
VOH  
VOL  
Maximum current  
Maximum current  
Programmable  
Programmable  
Each output  
V
V
mA  
mA  
pF  
30  
17  
60  
With CLO oscillator disabled  
High Level Input Voltage  
Low Level Input Voltage  
VIHCLI  
VILCLI  
CLIVDD/2 + 0.5  
V
V
CLIVDD/2 − 0.5  
ANALOG SPECIFICATIONS  
AVDD = 1.8 V, fCLI = 40.5 MHz, typical timing specifications, TMIN to TMAX, unless otherwise noted.  
Table 3.  
Parameter  
CDS1  
Test Conditions/Comments  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
DC Restore  
AVDD − 0.5 V  
Limit is the lower of AVDD + 0.3 V or 2.2 V  
VGA gain = 6.3 dB (Code 15, default value)  
1.21  
1.3  
0.5  
1.44  
0.8  
V
V
Allowable CCD Reset Transient  
CDS Gain Accuracy  
−3 dB CDS Gain  
0 dB CDS Gain  
+3 dB CDS Gain  
+6 dB CDS Gain  
−3.1  
−0.6  
2.7  
−2.6  
−0.1  
3.2  
−2.1  
+0.4  
3.7  
dB  
dB  
dB  
dB  
5.2  
5.7  
6.2  
Maximum Input Range Before  
Saturation  
−3 dB CDS Gain  
0 dB CDS Gain  
+3 dB CDS Gain  
1.4  
1.0  
0.7  
0.5  
V p-p  
V p-p  
V p-p  
V p-p  
+6 dB CDS Gain  
Allowable OB Pixel Amplitude1  
0 dB CDS Gain (Default)  
+6 dB CDS Gain  
−100  
−50  
+200  
+100  
mV  
mV  
VARIABLE GAIN AMPLIFIER (VGA)  
Gain Control Resolution  
Gain Monotonicity  
Gain Range  
1024  
Guaranteed  
Steps  
Low Gain  
Maximum Gain  
VGA Code 15, default  
VGA Code 1023  
6.3  
42.4  
dB  
dB  
Rev. B | Page 5 of 112  
 
 
AD9920A  
Parameter  
Test Conditions/Comments  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
BLACK LEVEL CLAMP  
Clamp Level Resolution  
Clamp Level  
Minimum Clamp Level  
Maximum Clamp Level  
ADC  
1024  
Steps  
Measured at ADC output  
Code 0  
Code 1023  
0
255  
LSB  
LSB  
Resolution  
Differential Nonlinearity (DNL)2  
12  
Bits  
LSB  
0.5  
No Missing Codes  
Guaranteed  
Integral Nonlinearity (INL)2  
Full-Scale Input Voltage  
VOLTAGE REFERENCE  
Reference Top Voltage (REFT)  
Reference Bottom Voltage (REFB)  
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE  
Gain Accuracy  
3.0  
2.0  
LSB  
V
1.4  
0.4  
V
V
Includes entire signal chain  
0 dB CDS gain  
Low Gain  
VGA Code 15  
5.7  
6.2  
6.7  
dB  
Gain = (0.0358 × code) + 5.76 dB  
Maximum Gain  
Peak Nonlinearity, 1 V Input Signal2  
Total Output Noise2  
VGA Code 1023  
6 dB VGA gain, 0 dB CDS gain applied  
AC-grounded input, 6 dB VGA gain  
applied  
Measured with step change on supply  
41.8  
42.3  
0.1  
0.6  
42.8  
0.3  
dB  
%
LSB rms  
Power Supply Rejection (PSR)2  
40  
dB  
1 Input signal characteristics are defined as shown in Figure 2.  
2 See the Terminology section.  
MAXIMUM INPUT LIMIT = LESSER OF  
2.2V OR AVDD + 0.3V  
+1.8V TYP (AVDD)  
800mV  
MAXIMUM  
+1.3V TYP (AVDD – 0.5V)  
DC RESTORE VOLTAGE  
500mV TYP  
RESET TRANSIENT  
1V MAXIMUM INPUT SIGNAL RANGE  
(0dB CDS GAIN)  
200mV MAX  
OPTICAL BLACK PIXEL  
0V (AVSS)  
MINIMUM INPUT LIMIT  
(AVSS – 0.3V)  
Figure 2. Input Signal Characteristics  
Rev. B | Page 6 of 112  
 
 
 
 
 
AD9920A  
TIMING SPECIFICATIONS  
CL = 20 pF, AVDD = DVDD = TCVDD = 1.8 V, fCLI = 40.5 MHz, unless otherwise noted.  
Table 4.  
Test Conditions/  
Comments  
Parameter  
Symbol Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
MASTER CLOCK  
See Figure 18  
CLI Clock Period  
CLI High/Low Pulse Width  
Delay from CLI Rising Edge to Internal  
Pixel Position 0  
tCONV  
24.7  
ns  
ns  
ns  
0.8 × tCONV/2 tCONV/2 1.2 × tCONV/2  
6
tCLIDLY  
SLAVE MODE SPECIFICATIONS  
VD Falling Edge to HD Falling Edge  
HD Falling Edge to CLI Rising Edge  
HD Falling Edge to CLO Rising Edge  
CLI Rising Edge to SHPLOC  
AFE  
See Figure 105  
tVDHD  
tHDCLI  
tHDCLO  
tCLISHP  
0
3
3
3
VD period − tCONV ns  
Only valid if OSC_RST = 0  
Only valid if OSC_RST = 1  
Internal sample edge  
tCONV − 2  
tCONV − 2  
tCONV − 2  
ns  
ns  
ns  
SHPLOC Sample Edge to SHDLOC  
Sample Edge  
SHDLOC Sample Edge to SHPLOC  
Sample Edge  
AFE Pipeline Delay  
AFE CLPOB Pulse Width  
DATA OUTPUTS  
See Figure 23  
See Figure 23  
See Figure 26  
tS1  
tS2  
0.8 × tCONV/2 tCONV/2 tCONV − tS2  
0.8 × tCONV/2 tCONV/2 tCONV − tS1  
16  
ns  
ns  
Cycles  
Pixels  
2
20  
Output Delay from DCLK Rising Edge  
See Figure 25  
tOD  
1
ns  
Pipeline Delay from SHP/SHD  
Sampling to Data Output  
16  
Cycles  
SERIAL INTERFACE  
Maximum SCK Frequency  
Must not exceed CLI  
frequency  
fSCLK  
40.5  
MHz  
SL to SCK Setup Time  
SCK to SL Hold Time  
SDATA Valid to SCK Rising Edge Setup  
SCK Falling Edge to SDATA Valid Hold  
TIMING CORE SETTING RESTRICTIONS  
tLS  
10  
10  
10  
10  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tLH  
tDS  
tDH  
Inhibited Region for SHP Edge  
Location1  
See Figure 23  
tSHPINH  
50  
62  
Edge  
location  
Inhibited Region for SHP or SHD with  
Respect to H-Clocks2, 3, 4  
See Figure 23 and  
Figure 24  
RETIME = 0, MASK = 0  
RETIME = 0, MASK = 1  
RETIME = 1, MASK = 0  
RETIME = 1, MASK = 1  
tSHDINH  
tSHDINH  
tSHPINH  
tSHPINH  
tDOUTINH  
HxNEGLOC − 14  
HxPOSLOC − 14  
HxNEGLOC − 14  
HxPOSLOC − 14  
SHDLOC + 1  
HxNEGLOC − 2  
HxPOSLOC − 2  
HxNEGLOC − 2  
HxPOSLOC − 2  
SHDLOC + 12  
Edge  
location  
Edge  
location  
Edge  
location  
Edge  
location  
Inhibited Region for DOUTPHASE Edge See Figure 23  
Location  
Edge  
location  
1 Applies only to slave mode operation. The inhibited area for SHP is needed to meet the timing requirement for tCLISHP for proper H-counter reset operation.  
2 When the HBLKRETIME bits (Address 0x35, Bits[3:0]) are enabled, the inhibit region for the SHD location changes to the inhibit region for the SHP location.  
3 When the HBLK masking polarity registers (V-sequence Register 0x18[24:21]) are set to 0, the H-edge reference becomes HxNEGLOC.  
4 The H-clock signals that have SHP/SHD inhibit regions depend on the HCLK mode: Mode 1 = H1; Mode 2 = H1, H2; Mode 3 = H1, H3; and 3-Phase Mode = Phase 1,  
Phase 2, and Phase 3.  
Rev. B | Page 7 of 112  
 
 
AD9920A  
VERTICAL DRIVER SPECIFICATIONS  
VH1, VH2 = 12 V; VM1, VM2, VMM = 0 V; VL1, VL2, VLL = −6 V; CL shown in load model; TA = 25°C.  
Table 5.  
Parameter  
Symbol Test Conditions/Comments  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
V1A TO V13  
Simplified load conditions, 3000 pF to  
ground + 30 Ω in series, SRSW = VSS  
Delay Time, VL to VM and VM to VH tPLM, tPMH  
Delay Time, VM to VL and VH to VM tPML, tPHM  
40  
40  
150  
315  
250  
165  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Rise Time, VL to VM  
Rise Time, VM to VH  
Fall Time, VM to VL  
Fall Time, VH to VM  
Output Currents  
At −7.25 V  
tRLM  
tRMH  
tFML  
tFHM  
10  
−22  
22  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
Ω
At −0.25 V  
At +0.25 V  
At +14.75 V  
RON  
−10  
35  
V14, V15, V16  
Simplified load conditions, 3000 pF to  
ground + 30 Ω in series  
Delay Time, VL to VM  
Delay Time, VM to VL  
Rise Time, VL to VM  
Fall Time, VM to VL  
Output Currents  
At −7.25 V  
tPLM  
tPML  
tRLM  
tFML  
45  
45  
345  
280  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
10  
−7  
mA  
mA  
Ω
At −0.25 V  
RON  
55  
SUBCK OUTPUT  
Delay Time, VLL to VH  
Delay Time, VH to VLL  
Delay Time, VLL to VMM  
Delay Time, VMM to VH  
Delay Time, VH to VMM  
Delay Time, VMM to VLL  
Rise Time, VLL to VH  
Rise Time, VLL to VMM  
Rise Time, VMM to VH  
Fall Time, VH to VLL  
Fall Time, VH to VMM  
Fall Time, VMM to VLL  
Output Currents  
At −7.25 V  
Simplified load conditions, 1000 pF to ground  
tPLH  
tPHL  
tPLM  
tPMH  
tPHM  
tPML  
tRLH  
tRLM  
tRMH  
tFHL  
tFHM  
tFML  
50  
50  
50  
50  
50  
50  
50  
55  
50  
55  
100  
40  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
20  
−12  
12  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
Ω
At −0.25 V  
At +0.25 V  
At +14.75 V  
RON  
−20  
35  
SRCTL INPUT RANGE  
Valid only when SRSW is high  
0.8  
VDVDD  
V
Rev. B | Page 8 of 112  
 
AD9920A  
V-DRIVER  
INPUT  
50%  
50%  
tRLM, tRMH, tRLH  
tPML, tPHM, tPHL  
90%  
90%  
V-DRIVER  
OUTPUT  
tPLM  
,
tPMH, tPLH  
tFML, tFHM, tFHL  
10%  
10%  
Figure 3. Definition of V-Driver Timing Specifications  
Rev. B | Page 9 of 112  
AD9920A  
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS  
Stresses above those listed under Absolute Maximum Ratings  
may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress  
rating only; functional operation of the device at these or any  
other conditions above those indicated in the operational  
section of this specification is not implied. Exposure to absolute  
maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect  
device reliability.  
Table 6.  
Parameter  
Rating  
AVDD to AVSS  
−0.3 V to +2.2 V  
TCVDD to TCVSS  
−0.3 V to +2.2 V  
HVDD1, HVDD2 to HVSS1, HVSS2  
RGVDD to RGVSS  
−0.3 V to +3.9 V  
−0.3 V to +3.9 V  
DVDD to DVSS  
−0.3 V to +2.2 V  
THERMAL RESISTANCE  
DRVDD to DRVSS/LDOVSS  
IOVDD to IOVSS  
VDVDD to VDVSS  
−0.3 V to +3.9 V  
−0.3 V to +3.9 V  
−0.3 V to +3.9 V  
−0.3 V to +3.9 V  
θJA is specified for the worst-case conditions, that is, a device  
soldered in a circuit board for surface-mount packages.  
CLIVDD to TCVSS  
Table 7. Thermal Resistance  
Package Type  
VH1, VH2 to VL1, VL2, VLL  
VH1, VH2 to VDVSS  
VL1, VL2 to VDVSS  
VM1, VM2 to VDVSS  
VLL to VDVSS  
−0.3 V to +25.0 V  
−0.3 V to +17.0 V  
−17.0 V to +0.3 V  
−6.0 V to +3.0 V  
−17.0 V to +0.3 V  
VLL − 0.3 V to VDVDD + 0.3 V  
VLx − 0.3 V to VHx + 0.3 V  
−0.3 V to RGVDD + 0.3 V  
−0.3 V to HVDDx + 0.3 V  
−0.3 V to VDVDD + 0.3 V  
θJA  
Unit  
CSP_BGA (BC-105-1)  
40.3  
°C/W  
ESD CAUTION  
VMM to VDVSS  
V1A to V16 to VDVSS  
RG and HL Outputs to RGVSS  
H1 to H8 Outputs to HVSSx  
VDR_EN, XSUBCNT, SRCTL, SRSW  
to VDVSS  
Digital Outputs to IOVSS  
Digital Inputs to IOVSS  
SCK, SL, SDATA to DVSS  
REFT, REFB, CCDIN to AVSS  
Junction Temperature  
−0.3 V to IOVDD + 0.3 V  
−0.3 V to IOVDD + 0.3 V  
−0.3 V to DVDD + 0.3 V  
−0.3 V to AVDD + 0.3 V  
150°C  
Lead Temperature  
(Soldering, 10 sec)  
350°C  
Rev. B | Page 10 of 112  
 
AD9920A  
PIN CONFIGURATION AND FUNCTION DESCRIPTIONS  
A1 CORNER  
INDEX AREA  
11 10  
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1  
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
BOTTOM VIEW  
(Not to Scale)  
Figure 4. Pin Configuration  
Table 8. Pin Function Descriptions  
Pin No.  
Mnemonic  
AVDD  
AVSS  
DVDD  
DVSS  
Type1 Description  
L6  
P
P
P
P
Analog Supply.  
Analog Supply Ground.  
Digital Logic Supply.  
Digital Logic Ground.  
CLI Input Supply.  
J7, K8  
A10  
A9  
L5  
CLIVDD  
TCVDD  
TCVSS  
DRVDD  
DRVSS/LDOVSS  
HVDD1  
HVSS1  
HVDD2  
HVSS2  
HVDD2  
HVSS2  
RGVDD  
RGVSS  
LDOIN  
LDOOUT  
IOVDD  
IOVSS  
VDVDD  
VDVSS  
VM1  
P
K6  
K4  
A2  
B2  
E1  
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
Analog Timing Core Supply.  
Analog Timing Core Ground.  
Data Driver Supply.  
Data Driver and LDO Ground.  
H-Driver Supply.  
H-Driver Ground.  
H-Driver Supply.  
H-Driver Ground.  
H-Driver Supply.  
E2  
G1  
G2  
J1  
J2  
L3  
K3  
B1  
C1  
H11  
G11  
C11  
C10  
E3  
H-Driver Ground.  
RG, HL Driver Supply.  
RG, HL Driver Ground.  
LDO 3.3 V Input.  
LDO Output Voltage.  
Digital I/O Supply.  
Digital I/O Ground.  
V-Driver Logic Supply (3 V).  
V-Driver Ground.  
P
P
P
V-Driver Midsupply.  
D3  
C3  
J3  
H3  
F3  
VL1  
VH1  
VH2  
VL2  
P
P
P
P
V-Driver Low Supply.  
V-Driver High Supply.  
V-Driver High Supply.  
V-Driver Low Supply.  
V-Driver Midsupply.  
VM2  
P
G3  
J4  
L7  
K7  
C2  
L8  
L9  
D11  
E10  
VMM  
VLL  
CCDIN  
CCDGND  
SRCTL  
REFT  
REFB  
VD  
HD  
P
P
V-Driver Midsupply for SUBCK Output.  
V-Driver Low Supply for SUBCK Output.  
CCD Signal Input.  
AI  
AI  
AI  
AO  
AO  
DIO  
DIO  
CCD Ground.  
Slew Rate Control Pin. Tie to VDVSS if not used.  
Voltage Reference Top Bypass.  
Voltage Reference Bottom Bypass.  
Vertical Sync Pulse.  
Horizontal Sync Pulse.  
Rev. B | Page 11 of 112  
 
AD9920A  
Pin No.  
E11  
K9  
K10  
L10  
B11  
K11  
C9  
Mnemonic  
SYNC/RST  
SL  
SDATA  
SCK  
VDR_EN  
XSUBCNT  
SRSW  
LEGEN  
CLI  
Type1 Description  
DO  
DI  
DI  
SYNC Pin (Internal Pull-Up Resistor)/External Reset Input (Active Low).  
3-Wire Serial Load Pulse (Internal Pull-Up Resistor).  
3-Wire Serial Data.  
DI  
3-Wire Serial Clock.  
DI  
Enable V-Outputs When High.  
DI  
XSUBCNT Input to SUBCK Buffer.  
DI  
DI  
Slew Rate Control Enable. Tie to ground to disable.  
Legacy Mode Enable Bar. Tie to ground for legacy 18-channel mode.  
J6  
J5  
DI  
Reference Clock Input.  
K5  
CLO  
GPO1  
GPO2  
GPO3  
GPO4  
GPO7  
GPO8  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
DO  
DO  
DO  
DO  
DO  
DO  
DO  
DO  
DO  
DO  
DO  
DO  
DO  
DO  
DO  
DO  
DO  
DO  
DO  
DO  
DO  
DO  
DO  
DO  
DO  
DO  
DO  
DO  
DO  
DO  
VO3  
VO3  
VO3  
VO3  
VO3  
VO3  
Clock Output for Crystal.  
General-Purpose Output.  
General-Purpose Output.  
General-Purpose Output.  
General-Purpose Output.  
General-Purpose Output.  
General-Purpose Output.  
Data Output (LSB).  
Data Output.  
Data Output.  
Data Output.  
Data Output.  
Data Output.  
Data Output.  
Data Output.  
Data Output.  
Data Output.  
Data Output.  
Data Output (MSB).  
Data Clock Output.  
CCD Horizontal Clock.  
CCD Horizontal Clock.  
CCD Horizontal Clock.  
CCD Horizontal Clock.  
CCD Horizontal Clock.  
CCD Horizontal Clock.  
CCD Horizontal Clock.  
CCD Horizontal Clock.  
CCD Horizontal Clock.  
CCD Reset Gate Clock.  
F10  
H9  
G10  
F11  
H10  
J11  
B9  
C6  
C7  
A8  
A7  
B7  
D5  
D6  
D7  
D8  
B6  
A6  
A5  
B4  
A4  
A3  
B3  
D1  
D2  
F1  
D9  
D10  
D11  
DCLK  
H1  
H2  
H3  
H4  
H5  
H6  
H7  
H8  
HL  
RG  
V1A  
V1B  
V2A  
V2B  
V3A  
V3B  
F2  
H1  
H2  
K1  
K2  
L2  
L4  
G9  
G6  
G5  
E9  
J9  
F6  
CCD Vertical Transfer Clock. Three-level output (XV1 + XV16).  
CCD Vertical Transfer Clock. Three-level output (XV1 + XV17).  
CCD Vertical Transfer Clock. Three-level output (XV2 + XV18).  
CCD Vertical Transfer Clock. Three-level output (XV2 + XV19).  
CCD Vertical Transfer Clock. Three-level output (XV3 + XV20).  
CCD Vertical Transfer Clock. Three-level output. LEGEN is low, XV3 + XV21. LEGEN is high,  
XV23 + XV21.  
F5  
E5  
V4  
V5  
VO3  
VO3  
CCD Vertical Transfer Clock. Three-level output (XV4 + XV22).  
CCD Vertical Transfer Clock. Three-level output. LEGEN is low, XV5 + XV23. LEGEN is high,  
XV5 + GPO5.  
D10  
V6  
VO3  
CCD Vertical Transfer Clock. Three-level output. LEGEN is low, XV6 + XV24. LEGEN is high,  
XV6 + GPO6.  
F9  
F7  
V7  
V8  
VO2  
VO2  
CCD Vertical Transfer Clock. Two-level output (XV7).  
CCD Vertical Transfer Clock. Two-level output (XV8).  
Rev. B | Page 12 of 112  
AD9920A  
Pin No.  
D9  
C4  
C5  
B5  
E6  
E7  
C8  
J8  
Mnemonic  
V9  
V10  
V11  
V12  
V13  
V14  
V15  
V16  
Type1 Description  
VO2  
VO2  
VO2  
VO2  
VO2  
VO2  
VO2  
VO2  
CCD Vertical Transfer Clock. Two-level output (XV9).  
CCD Vertical Transfer Clock. Two-level output (XV10).  
CCD Vertical Transfer Clock. Two-level output (XV11).  
CCD Vertical Transfer Clock. Two-level output (XV12).  
CCD Vertical Transfer Clock. Two-level output (XV13).  
CCD Vertical Transfer Clock. Two-level output (XV14).  
CCD Vertical Transfer Clock. Two-level output (XV15).  
CCD Vertical Transfer Clock. Two-level output (XV24). Available only when LEGEN is high  
(19-channel mode).  
G7  
SUBCK  
NC  
VO3  
CCD Substrate Clock Output.  
Not Internally Connected.  
A1, A11, B8,  
B10, J10, L1,  
L11  
1 AI = analog input; AO = analog output; DI = digital input; DO = digital output; DIO = digital input/output; P = power; VO2 = vertical driver output, two-level;  
VO3 = vertical driver output, three-level.  
Rev. B | Page 13 of 112  
 
 
AD9920A  
TYPICAL PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS  
400  
3.0  
2.5  
2.0  
1.5  
1.0  
0.5  
0
3.3V, 2.0V  
350  
300  
250  
200  
150  
100  
50  
3.0V, 1.8V  
2.7V, 1.6V  
–0.5  
–1.0  
0
18  
32  
40  
0
0.5k  
1.0k  
1.5k  
2.0k  
2.5k  
3.0k  
3.5k  
4.0k  
FREQUENCY (MHz)  
ADC OUTPUT CODE  
Figure 5. AFETG Power vs. Frequency (V-Driver Not Included);  
Figure 7. Typical System Integral Nonlinearity (INL) Performance  
AVDD = TCVDD = DVDD = 1.8 V, All Other Supplies at 2.7 V, 3.0 V, or 3.3 V  
1.0  
0.8  
50  
45  
40  
35  
0.6  
0.4  
0.2  
30  
–3dB CDS GAIN  
0
25  
20  
15  
10  
5
0dB CDS GAIN  
+3dB CDS GAIN  
+6dB CDS GAIN  
–0.2  
–0.4  
–0.6  
–0.8  
–1.0  
0
0
0.5k  
1.0k  
1.5k  
2.0k  
2.5k  
3.0k  
3.5k  
4.0k  
0
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
ADC OUTPUT CODE  
TOTAL GAIN — CDS + VGA (dB)  
Figure 6. Typical Differential Nonlinearity (DNL) Performance  
Figure 8. Output Noise vs. Total Gain (CDS + VGA)  
Rev. B | Page 14 of 112  
 
 
 
AD9920A  
EQUIVALENT CIRCUITS  
IOVDD  
AVDD  
330  
R
DIGITAL  
INPUTS  
CCDIN  
AVSS  
AVSS  
IOVSS  
Figure 9. CCDIN  
Figure 12. Digital Inputs  
HVDD OR  
RGVDD  
DVDD  
DRVDD  
DATA  
RG, HL, H1 TO H8  
THREE-  
STATE  
D0 TO D11  
OUTPUT  
THREE-STATE  
DVSS  
DRVSS  
HVSS OR  
RGVSS  
Figure 10. Digital Data Outputs  
Figure 13. H1 to H8, HL, RG Drivers  
VDVDD  
VDVDD  
3.5k  
3.5k  
XSUBCNT  
VDR_EN  
R
VDVSS  
VDVSS  
Figure 11. XSUBCNT  
Figure 14. VDR_EN  
Rev. B | Page 15 of 112  
 
AD9920A  
TERMINOLOGY  
Differential Nonlinearity (DNL)  
Power Supply Rejection (PSR)  
An ideal ADC exhibits code transitions that are exactly 1 LSB  
apart. DNL is the deviation from this ideal value. It is often  
specified in terms of resolution for which no missing codes are  
guaranteed. No missing codes guaranteed to 12-bit resolution  
indicates that all 4096 codes, each for its respective input, must  
be present over all operating conditions.  
The PSR is measured with a step change applied to the supply  
pins. The PSR specification is calculated from the change in the  
data outputs for a given step change in the supply voltage.  
Total Output Noise  
The rms output noise is measured using histogram techniques.  
The standard deviation of the ADC output codes is calculated  
in LSB and represents the rms noise level of the total signal  
chain at the specified gain setting. The output noise can be  
converted to an equivalent voltage using the relationship  
1 LSB = (ADC Full Scale/2n Codes)  
where n is the bit resolution of the ADC.  
For the AD9920A, 1 LSB = 0.244 mV.  
Integral Nonlinearity (INL)  
INL is defined as the maximum deviation of the actual analog  
output from the ideal output, determined by a straight line  
drawn from zero scale to full scale.  
Peak Nonlinearity  
Peak nonlinearity, a full signal chain specification, refers to the  
peak deviation of the output of the AD9920A from a true straight  
line. The point used as zero scale occurs 0.5 LSB before the first  
code transition. Positive full scale is defined as a level 1 LSB and  
0.5 LSB beyond the last code transition. The deviation is measured  
from the middle of each particular output code to the true straight  
line. The error is then expressed as a percentage of the 2 V ADC  
full-scale signal. The input signal is always appropriately amplified  
to fill the ADC full-scale range.  
Rev. B | Page 16 of 112  
 
 
AD9920A  
THEORY OF OPERATION  
Figure 15 shows the typical system block diagram for the AD9920A  
in master mode. The CCD output is processed by the AD9920A  
AFE circuitry, which consists of a CDS, black level clamp, and  
ADC. The digitized pixel information is sent to the digital image  
processor chip, which performs the postprocessing and com-  
pression. To operate the CCD, all CCD timing parameters are  
programmed into the AD9920A from the system microprocessor  
through the 3-wire serial interface. From the master clock, CLI,  
provided by the image processor or external crystal, the AD9920A  
generates the CCD horizontal and vertical clocks and the internal  
AFE clocks. External synchronization is provided by a sync pulse  
from the microprocessor, which resets the internal counters and  
resyncs the VD and HD outputs.  
The AD9920A includes programmable general-purpose outputs  
(GPOs) that can trigger mechanical shutter and strobe (flash)  
circuitry.  
Figure 16 and Figure 17 show the maximum horizontal and  
vertical counter dimensions for the AD9920A. All internal  
horizontal and vertical clocking is controlled by these counters,  
which specify line and pixel locations. Maximum HD length is  
16,384 pixels per line, and maximum VD length is 8192 lines  
per field.  
MAXIMUM COUNTER DIMENSIONS  
14-BIT HORIZONTAL = 16,384 PIXELS MAXIMUM  
V1A TO V16, SUBCK  
H1 TO H8, HL,  
RG, VSUB  
13-BIT VERTICAL = 8192 LINES MAXIMUM  
D0 TO D11  
CCDIN  
DIGITAL  
IMAGE  
PROCESSING  
ASIC  
DCLK  
HD, VD  
CLI  
CCD  
AD9920A  
AFETG  
V-DRIVER  
GPO1 TO GPO8  
SERIAL  
INTERFACE  
MICROPROCESSOR  
SYNC  
Figure 16. Vertical and Horizontal Counters  
Figure 15. Typical System Block Diagram, Master Mode  
H-COUNTER BEHAVIOR IN SLAVE MODE  
Alternatively, the AD9920A can be operated in slave mode. In  
this mode, the VD and HD are provided externally from the  
image processor, and all AD9920A timing is synchronized with  
VD and HD.  
In the AD9920A, the internal H-counter holds at its maximum  
count of 16,383 instead of rolling over. This feature allows the  
AD9920A to be used in applications that contain a line length  
greater than 16,384 pixels. Although no programming values  
for the vertical and horizontal signals are available beyond 8191,  
the H, RG, and AFE clocking continues to operate, sampling the  
remaining pixels on the line.  
The H-drivers for H1 to H8, HL, and RG are included in the  
AD9920A, allowing these clocks to be directly connected to the  
CCD. An H-driver voltage of up to 3.6 V is supported. V1A to  
V16 and SUBCK vertical clocks are included as well, allowing  
the AD9920A to provide all horizontal and vertical clocks  
necessary to clock data out of a CCD.  
MAXIMUM VD LENGTH IS 8192 LINES  
VD  
MAXIMUM HD LENGTH IS 16,384 PIXELS  
HD  
CLI  
Figure 17. Maximum VD/HD Dimensions  
Rev. B | Page 17 of 112  
 
 
 
 
AD9920A  
divides the master clock period into 64 steps or edge positions.  
Using a 40.5 MHz CLI frequency, the edge resolution of the  
Precision Timing core is approximately 0.4 ns. If a 1× system clock  
is not available, it is possible to use a 2× reference clock by pro-  
gramming the CLIDIVIDE register (AFE Register Address 0x0D).  
The AD9920A then internally divides the CLI frequency by 2.  
HIGH SPEED PRECISION TIMING CORE  
The AD9920A generates high speed timing signals using the  
flexible Precision Timing core. This core is the foundation for  
generating the timing used for both the CCD and the AFE; it  
includes the reset gate (RG), horizontal drivers (H1 to H8, HL),  
and SHP/SHD sample clocks. A unique architecture makes it  
routine for the system designer to optimize image quality by  
providing precise control over the horizontal CCD readout  
and the AFE correlated double sampling.  
High Speed Clock Programmability  
Figure 19 shows when the high speed clocks RG, H1 to H8, HL,  
SHP, and SHD are generated. The RG pulse has programmable  
rising and falling edges and can be inverted using the polarity  
control. Horizontal Clock H1 has programmable rising and falling  
edges and polarity control. In HCLK Mode 1, H3, H5, and H7  
are equal to H1. H2, H4, H6, and H8 are always inverses of H1.  
The high speed timing of the AD9920A operates the same  
way in either master or slave mode configuration. For more  
information on synchronization and pipeline delays, see  
the Power-Up Sequence for Master Mode section.  
The edge location registers are each six bits wide, allowing the  
selection of all 64 edge locations. Figure 23 shows the default  
timing locations for all of the high speed clock signals.  
Timing Resolution  
The Precision Timing core uses a 1× master clock input as a  
reference (CLI). This clock should be the same as the CCD pixel  
clock frequency. Figure 18 illustrates how the internal timing core  
POSITION  
CLI  
P[0]  
P[16]  
P[32]  
P[48]  
P[64] = P[0]  
...  
tCLIDLY  
...  
1 PIXEL  
PERIOD  
tCONV  
NOTES  
1. PIXEL CLOCK PERIOD IS DIVIDED INTO 64 POSITIONS, PROVIDING FINE EDGE RESOLUTION FOR HIGH SPEED CLOCKS.  
t
= 6 ns TYP).  
2. THERE IS A FIXED DELAY FROM THE CLI INPUT TO THE INTERNAL PIXEL PERIOD POSITIONS (  
CLIDLY  
Figure 18. High Speed Clock Resolution from CLI, Master Clock Input  
1
CCD  
2
SIGNAL  
3
5
4
RG  
6
8
H1, H3, H5, H7  
H2, H4, H6, H8  
7
HL  
PROGRAMMABLE CLOCK POSITIONS:  
1
SHP SAMPLE LOCATION.  
2
SHD SAMPLE LOCATION.  
3
RG RISING EDGE.  
4
RG FALLING EDGE.  
5
H1 RISING EDGE.  
6
H1 FALLING EDGE.  
7
HL RISING EDGE.  
8
HL FALLING EDGE.  
Figure 19. High Speed Clock Programmable Locations (HCLKMODE = 0x01)  
Rev. B | Page 18 of 112  
 
 
 
AD9920A  
Table 10 shows a comparison of the different programmable  
H-Driver and RG Outputs  
settings for each HCLK mode. Figure 20 and Figure 21 show the  
settings for HCLK Mode 2 and HCLK Mode 3, respectively.  
In addition to the programmable timing positions, the AD9920A  
features on-chip output drivers for the RG, HL, and H1 to H8  
outputs. These drivers are powerful enough to drive the CCD  
inputs directly. The H-driver and RG current can be adjusted for  
optimum rise/fall time for a particular load by using the drive  
strength control registers (Address 0x36 and Address 0x37). The  
3-bit drive setting for each H1 to H8 output is adjustable in  
4.3 mA increments: 0 = off, 1 = 4.3 mA, 2 = 8.6 mA, 3 = 12.9 mA,  
4 = 17.3 mA, 5 = 21.6 mA, 6 = 25.9 mA, and 7 = 30.2 mA.  
It is recommended that all H1 to H8 outputs on the AD9920A be  
used together for maximum flexibility in drive strength settings.  
A typical CCD with H1 and H2 inputs should have only the  
AD9920A H1, H3, H5, and H7 outputs connected together to  
drive the CCD H1 and should have only the AD9920A H2, H4,  
H6, and H8 outputs connected together to drive the CCD H2.  
In 3-phase HCLK mode, only six of the HCLK outputs are used,  
with two outputs driving each of the three phases:  
The 3-bit drive settings for the HL and RG outputs are also  
adjustable in 4.3 mA increments, but with a maximum drive  
strength of 17.3 mA: 0 = off, 1 = 4.3 mA, 2 = 8.6 mA, 3 = 12.9 mA,  
4 = 4.3 mA, 5 = 8.6 mA, 6 = 12.9 mA, and 7 = 17.3 mA.  
H1 and H2 are connected to CCD Phase 1.  
H5 and H6 are connected to CCD Phase 2.  
H7 and H8 are connected to CCD Phase 3.  
As shown in Figure 19, when HCLK Mode 1 is used, the H2,  
H4, H6, and H8 outputs are inverses of the H1, H3, H5, and H7  
outputs. Using the HCLKMODE register (Address 0x24,  
Bits[4:0]), it is possible to select a different configuration.  
Table 9. Timing Core Register Parameters for H1, H2, HL, RG, SHP, and SHD  
Parameter  
Length (Bits)  
Range  
Description  
Positive Edge  
Negative Edge  
Sampling Location  
Drive Strength  
6
6
6
3
0 to 63 edge location  
0 to 63 edge location  
0 to 63 edge location  
0 to 7 current steps  
Positive edge location for H1, H2, HL, H3P1, and RG.  
Negative edge location for H1, H2, HL, H3P1, and RG.  
Sampling location for internal SHP and SHD signals.  
Drive current for H1 to H8, HL, and RG outputs (4.3 mA per step).  
Table 10. HCLK Modes, Selected by Address 0x24, Bits[4:0]  
HCLKMODE  
Register Value  
Description  
Mode 1  
0x01  
H1 edges are programmable with H3 = H5 = H7 = H1, H2 = H4 = H6 = H8 = inverse of H1.  
Mode 2  
0x02  
H1 edges are programmable with H3 = H5 = H7 = H1.  
H2 edges are programmable with H4 = H6 = H8 = H2.  
Mode 3  
0x04  
0x10  
H1 edges are programmable with H3 = H1 and H2 = H4 = inverse of H1.  
H5 edges are programmable with H7 = H5 and H6 = H8 = inverse of H5.  
3-Phase Mode  
H1 edges are programmable using Address 0x33 and H2 = H1 (Phase 1).  
H5 edges are programmable using Address 0x31 and H6 = H5 (Phase 2).  
H7 edges are programmable using Address 0x30 and H8 = H7 (Phase 3).  
Invalid Selection  
All other values Invalid register settings. Do not use.  
Rev. B | Page 19 of 112  
 
AD9920A  
1
2
H1, H3, H5, H7  
H2, H4, H6, H8  
4
3
H1 TO H8 PROGRAMMABLE LOCATIONS:  
1
H1 RISING EDGE.  
2
H1 FALLING EDGE.  
3
H2 RISING EDGE.  
4
H2 FALLING EDGE.  
Figure 20. HCLK Mode 2 Operation  
1
2
H1, H3  
H2, H4  
3
4
H5, H7  
H6, H8  
H1 TO H8 PROGRAMMABLE LOCATIONS:  
1
2
3
4
H1 RISING EDGE.  
H1 FALLING EDGE.  
H5 RISING EDGE.  
H5 FALLING EDGE.  
Figure 21. HCLK Mode 3 Operation  
2
1
H1, H2  
4
3
H5, H6  
5
6
H7, H8  
H1 TO H8 PROGRAMMABLE LOCATIONS:  
1
H1 FALLING EDGE.  
H1 RISING EDGE.  
H5 FALLING EDGE.  
H5 RISING EDGE.  
H7 RISING EDGE.  
H7 FALLING EDGE.  
2
3
4
5
6
Figure 22. 3-Phase HCLK Mode Operation  
Rev. B | Page 20 of 112  
 
 
AD9920A  
POSITION  
CLI  
P[0]  
P[16]  
P[32]  
P[48]  
P[64] = P[0]  
RGr[0]  
H1r[0]  
RGf[16]  
RG  
H1  
H2  
H1f[32]  
tSHDINH  
tSHDINH  
tS2  
tS1  
CCD  
SIGNAL  
SHPLOC[32]  
tSHPINH  
SHP  
62  
50  
SHDLOC[0]  
1
SHD  
12  
DOUTPHASEP  
tDOUTINH  
NOTES  
1. ALL SIGNAL EDGES ARE FULLY PROGRAMMABLE TO ANY OF THE 64 POSITIONS WITHIN ONE PIXEL PERIOD.  
TYPICAL POSITIONS FOR EACH SIGNAL ARE SHOWN. HCLK MODE 1 IS SHOWN.  
2. CERTAIN POSITIONS SHOULD BE AVOIDED FOR EACH SIGNAL, SHOWN ABOVE AS INHIBIT REGIONS.  
3. IF A SETTING IN THE INHIBIT REGION IS USED, AN UNSTABLE PIXEL SHIFT CAN OCCUR IN THE HBLK LOCATION OR AFE PIPELINE.  
4. THE t  
5. THE t  
AREA FROM 50 TO 62 ONLY APPLIES IN SLAVE MODE.  
AREA WILL APPLY TO EITHER H1 RISING OR FALLING EDGE, DEPENDING ON THE VALUE OF THE  
SHPINH  
SHDINH  
H1HBLK MASKING POLARITY.  
6. THE t  
AREA CAN ALSO BE CHANGED TO A t AREA IF THE H1HBLKRETIME BIT = 1.  
SHDINH  
SHPINH  
Figure 23. High Speed Timing Default Locations  
TAP POSITION  
PHASE 1  
P[0]  
P[16]  
P[32]  
P[48]  
P[64] = P[0]  
SHDINH/SHPINH  
SHDINH/SHPINH  
PHASE 2  
PHASE 3  
SHDINH/SHPINH  
RGr[0]  
HLr[0]  
RGf[16]  
RG  
HL  
HLf[32]  
tS1  
CCD  
SIGNAL  
SHPLOC[32]  
SHP  
SHD  
SHDLOC[0]  
NOTES  
1. ALL SIGNAL EDGES ARE FULLY PROGRAMMABLE TO ANY OF THE 64 POSITIONS WITHIN ONE PIXEL PERIOD.  
TYPICAL POSITIONS FOR EACH SIGNAL ARE SHOWN USING 3-PHASE HBLK MODE.  
2. THE RISING EDGE OF EACH HCLK PHASE HAS AN ASSOCIATED SHDINH.  
3. WHEN THE HBLK RETIME BITS (0x35 [3:0]) ARE ENABLED, THE INHIBITED AREA BECOMES SHPINH.  
4. WHEN THE HBLK MASK LEVEL FOR PHASE 1, 2, OR 3 IS CHANGED TO LOW, THE INHIBIT AREA IS  
REFERENCED TO THE HCLK FALLING EDGE, INSTEAD OF THE HCLK RISING EDGE.  
Figure 24. High Speed Timing Typical Locations, 3-Phase HCLK Mode  
Rev. B | Page 21 of 112  
 
 
AD9920A  
Normally, the data output and DCLK signals track in phase,  
based on the contents of the DOUTPHASE registers. The DCLK  
output phase can also be held fixed with respect to the data out-  
puts by setting the DCLKMODE register high (Address 0x39,  
Bit 16). In this mode, the DCLK output remains at a fixed phase  
equal to a delayed version of CLI, and the data output phase  
remains programmable.  
DIGITAL DATA OUTPUTS  
The AD9920A data output and DCLK phase are programmable  
using the DOUTPHASE registers (Address 0x39, Bits[13:0]).  
DOUTPHASEP (Bits[5:0]) selects any edge location from 0 to  
63, as shown in Figure 25. DOUTPHASEN (Bits[13:8]) does  
not actually program the phase of the data outputs but is used  
internally and should always be programmed to a value of  
DOUTPHASEP plus 32 edges. For example, if DOUTPHASEP  
is set to 0, DOUTPHASEN should be set to 32 (0x20).  
The pipeline delay through the AD9920A is shown in Figure 26.  
After the CCD input is sampled by SHD, there is a 16-cycle  
delay until the data is available.  
P[48]  
P[0]  
P[64] = P[0]  
P[16]  
P[32]  
PIXEL  
PERIOD  
DCLK  
tOD  
DOUT  
NOTES  
1. DATA OUTPUT (DOUT) AND DCLK PHASE ARE ADJUSTABLE WITH RESPECT TO THE PIXEL PERIOD.  
2. WITHIN ONE CLOCK PERIOD, THE DATA TRANSITION CAN BE PROGRAMMED TO 64 DIFFERENT LOCATIONS.  
3. DCLK CAN BE INVERTED WITH RESPECT TO DOUT BY USING THE DCLKINV REGISTER.  
Figure 25. Digital Output Phase Adjustment Using DOUTPHASEP Register  
CLI  
t
CLIDLY  
N + 15 N + 16 N + 17  
N
N + 1  
N + 2  
N + 5  
N + 6  
N + 7  
N + 8  
N + 9 N + 10 N + 11 N + 12 N + 13 N + 14  
N + 3  
N + 4  
CCDIN  
SAMPLE PIXEL N  
SHD  
(INTERNAL)  
ADC DOUT  
(INTERNAL)  
N – 17 N – 16 N – 15 N – 14 N – 13 N – 12 N – 11 N – 10  
tDOUTINH  
N – 9  
N – 8  
N – 7  
N – 6  
N – 5  
N – 4  
N – 3  
N – 2  
N – 1  
N
N + 1  
DCLK  
DOUT  
PIPELINE LATENCY = 16 CYCLES  
N – 17 N – 16 N – 15 N – 14 N – 13 N – 12 N – 11 N – 10 N – 9 N – 8 N – 7  
N – 6  
N – 5  
N – 4  
N – 3  
N – 2  
N – 1  
N
N + 1  
NOTES  
1. TIMING VALUES SHOWN ARE SHDLOC = 0, WITH DCLKMODE = 0.  
2. HIGHER VALUES OF SHD AND/OR DOUTPHASE SHIFT DOUT TRANSITION TO THE RIGHT, WITH RESPECT TO CLI LOCATION.  
3. RECOMMENDED VALUE FOR DOUTPHASE IS TO USE SHPLOC OR UP TO 15 EDGES FOLLOWING SHPLOC.  
Figure 26. Digital Data Output Pipeline Delay  
Rev. B | Page 22 of 112  
 
 
 
AD9920A  
CLPOB and PBLK Masking Areas  
HORIZONTAL CLAMPING AND BLANKING  
Additionally, the AD9920A allows the CLPOB and PBLK signals  
to be disabled in certain lines in the field without changing any  
of the existing CLPOB pattern settings.  
The horizontal clamping and blanking pulses of the AD9920A are  
fully programmable to suit a variety of applications. Individual  
control is provided for CLPOB, PBLK, and HBLK in the different  
regions of each field. This allows the dark pixel clamping and  
blanking patterns to be changed at each stage of the readout to  
accommodate different image transfer timing and high speed  
line shifts.  
To use CLPOB (or PBLK) masking, the CLPMASKSTART  
(PBLKMASKSTART) and CLPMASKEND (PBLKMASKEND)  
registers are programmed to specify the start and end lines in  
the field where the CLPOB (PBLK) patterns are ignored. The  
three sets of start and end registers allow up to three CLPOB  
(PBLK) masking areas to be created.  
Individual CLPOB and PBLK Patterns  
The AFE horizontal timing consists of CLPOB and PBLK, as  
shown in Figure 27. These two signals are programmed inde-  
pendently using the registers shown in Table 11. The start polarity  
for the CLPOB (or PBLK) signal is CLPOBPOL (PBLKPOL), and  
the first and second toggle positions of the pulse are CLPOBTOG1  
(PBLKTOG1) and CLPOBTOG2 (PBLKTOG2). Both signals  
are active low and should be programmed accordingly.  
The CLPOB and PBLK masking registers are not specific to a  
certain V-sequence; they are always active for any existing field  
of timing. During operation, to disable the CLPOB masking  
feature, these registers must be set to the maximum value of  
0x1FFF or a value greater than the programmed VD length.  
Note that to disable CLPOB (or PBLK) masking during power-up,  
it is recommended that CLPMASKSTART (PBLKMASKSTART)  
be set to 8191 and that CLPMASKEND (PBLKMASKEND) be  
set to 0. This prevents any accidental masking caused by register  
update events.  
A separate pattern for CLPOB and PBLK can be programmed  
for each vertical sequence. As described in the Vertical Timing  
Generation section, several V-sequences can be created, each  
containing a unique pulse pattern for CLPOB and PBLK.  
Figure 57 shows how the sequence change positions divide the  
readout field into regions. By assigning a different V-sequence  
to each region, the CLPOB and PBLK signals can change with  
each change in the vertical timing.  
Table 11. CLPOB and PBLK Pattern Registers  
Length  
Register  
(Bits)  
Range  
Description  
CLPOBPOL  
1
High/low  
Starting polarity of CLPOB for each V-sequence.  
PBLKPOL  
1
High/low  
Starting polarity of PBLK for each V-sequence.  
CLPOBTOG1  
CLPOBTOG2  
PBLKTOG1  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
0 to 8191 pixel location  
0 to 8191 pixel location  
0 to 8191 pixel location  
0 to 8191 pixel location  
0 to 8191 line location  
0 to 8191 line location  
0 to 8191 line location  
0 to 8191 line location  
First CLPOB toggle position within line for each V-sequence.  
Second CLPOB toggle position within line for each V-sequence.  
First PBLK toggle position within line for each V-sequence.  
Second PBLK toggle position within line for each V-sequence.  
CLPOB masking area—starting line within field (maximum of three areas).  
CLPOB masking area—ending line within field (maximum of three areas).  
PBLK masking area—starting line within field (maximum of three areas).  
PBLK masking area—ending line within field (maximum of three areas).  
PBLKTOG2  
CLPMASKSTART  
CLPMASKEND  
PBLKMASKSTART  
PBLKMASKEND  
Rev. B | Page 23 of 112  
 
 
AD9920A  
HD  
2
3
CLPOB  
PBLK  
1
ACTIVE  
ACTIVE  
PROGRAMMABLE SETTINGS:  
1
2
3
START POLARITY (CLAMP AND BLANK REGION ARE ACTIVE LOW).  
FIRST TOGGLE POSITION.  
SECOND TOGGLE POSITION.  
Figure 27. Clamp and Preblank Pulse Placement  
NO CLPOB SIGNAL  
FOR LINES 6 TO 8  
NO CLPOB SIGNAL  
FOR LINE 600  
VD  
0
1
2
597 598  
HD  
CLPOB  
CLPMASKSTART1 = 6  
CLPMASKEND1 = 9  
CLPMASKSTART2 = 600  
CLPMASKEND2 = 601  
Figure 28. CLPOB Masking Example  
Individual HBLK Patterns  
HBLK Mode 0 Operation  
The HBLK programmable timing shown in Figure 29 is similar to  
the timing of CLPOB and PBLK; however, there is no start polarity  
control. Only the toggle positions are used to designate the start  
and stop positions of the blanking period. Additionally, separate  
masking polarity controls for each H-clock phase designate the  
polarity of the horizontal clock signals during the blanking period.  
Setting HBLKMASK_H1 high sets H1—and, therefore, H3, H5,  
and H7—low during the blanking, as shown in Figure 30. As with  
the CLPOB and PBLK signals, HBLK registers are available in  
each V-sequence, allowing different blanking signals to be used  
with different vertical timing sequences.  
There are six toggle positions available for HBLK. Normally, only  
two of the toggle positions are used to generate the standard  
HBLK interval. However, the additional toggle positions can be  
used to generate special HBLK patterns, as shown in Figure 31.  
The pattern in this example uses all six toggle positions to gen-  
erate two extra groups of pulses during the HBLK interval. By  
changing the toggle positions, different patterns can be created.  
Separate toggle positions are available for even and odd lines. If  
alternation is not needed, the same values should be loaded into  
the registers for even (HBLKTOGE) and odd (HBLKTOGO) lines.  
Multiple repeats of the HBLK signal are enabled by setting the  
HBLKLEN and HBLKREP registers along with the six toggle  
positions (four are shown in Figure 32).  
The AD9920A supports two modes of HBLK operation. HBLK  
Mode 0 supports basic operation and pixel mixing HBLK oper-  
ation. HBLK Mode 1 supports advanced HBLK operation.  
Generating HBLK Line Alternation  
The following sections describe each mode in detail. Register  
parameters are described in detail in Table 12.  
HBLK Mode 0 provides the ability to alternate different HBLK  
toggle positions on even and odd lines. HBLK line alternation  
can be used alone or in conjunction with V-pattern odd/even  
alternation (see the Generating Line Alternation for V-Sequences  
and HBLK section). Separate toggle positions are available for  
even and odd lines. If even/odd line alternation is not needed,  
the same values should be loaded into the registers for even  
(HBLKTOGE) and odd (HBLKTOGO) lines.  
Rev. B | Page 24 of 112  
 
 
AD9920A  
HD  
HBLKSTART  
HBLKEND  
BLANK  
BLANK  
HBLK  
BASIC HBLK PULSE IS GENERATED USING HBLKSTART AND HBLKEND REGISTERS  
Figure 29. Typical Horizontal Blanking Pulse Placement (HBLK_MODE = 0)  
HD  
HBLK  
H1/H3/H5/H7  
THE POLARITY OF H1/H3/H5/H7 DURING BLANKING IS PROGRAMMABLE  
(H2/H4/H6/H8 AND HL ARE SEPARATELY PROGRAMMABLE)  
H1/H3/H5/H7  
H2/H4/H6/H8  
Figure 30. HBLK Masking Polarity Control  
HBLKTOGE2  
HBLKTOGE5  
HBLKTOGE6  
HBLKEND  
HBLKTOGE4  
HBLKTOGE3  
HBLKTOGE1  
HBLKSTART  
HBLK  
H1/H3  
H2/H4  
SPECIAL H-BLANK PATTERN IS CREATED USING MULTIPLE HBLK TOGGLE POSITIONS  
Figure 31. Using Multiple Toggle Positions for HBLK (HBLK_MODE = 0)  
HBLKTOGE2  
HBLKTOGE1 HBLKTOGE3  
HBLKTOGE4  
HBLKSTART  
HBLKEND  
HBLK  
HBLKLEN  
HBLKREP = 3  
H1/H3  
H2/H4  
HBLKREP NUMBER 1  
HBLKREP NUMBER 2  
HBLKREP NUMBER 3  
H-BLANK REPEATING PATTERN IS CREATED USING HBLKLEN AND HBLKREP REGISTERS  
Figure 32. HBLK Repeating Pattern Using HBLK_MODE = 0  
Rev. B | Page 25 of 112  
 
 
 
 
AD9920A  
Table 12. HBLK Pattern Registers  
Length  
(Bits)  
Register  
Range  
Description  
HBLK_MODE  
2
0 to 1 HBLK modes  
Enables different HBLK toggle position operations.  
0 = normal mode; six toggle positions available for even and odd lines.  
If even/odd alternation is not needed, set toggles for even and odd lines to the  
same value. In addition to the six toggle positions, the HBLKSTART, HBLKEND,  
HBLKLEN, and HBLKREP registers can be used to generate HBLK patterns. If even/  
odd alternation is not needed, set toggles for even and odd lines to the same value.  
1 = advanced HBLK mode; divides HBLK interval into six repeat areas.  
Uses HBLKSTARTA/B/C and RAxHxREPA/B/C registers; the latter, depending on the  
mode of operation, are stored in the HBLKTOGO1 to HBLKTOGO6 and HBLKTOGE1  
to HBLKTOGE6 registers (Address 0x19 to Address 0x1E; see Table 63).  
2 = test mode only; do not access.  
3 = test mode only; do not access.  
HBLKSTART  
HBLKEND  
HBLKLEN  
13  
13  
13  
13  
1
1
1
1
0 to 8191 pixel location Start location for HBLK in HBLK Mode 0 and HBLK Mode 1.  
0 to 8191 pixel location End location for HBLK in HBLK Mode 0 and HBLK Mode 1.  
0 to 8191 pixels  
0 to 8191 repetitions  
High/low  
High/low  
High/low  
HBLK length in HBLK Mode 0 and HBLK Mode 1.  
Number of HBLK repetitions in HBLK Mode 0 and HBLK Mode 1.  
Masking polarity for H1/H3/H5/H7 during HBLK.  
Masking polarity for H2/H4/H6/H8 during HBLK.  
Masking polarity for HL during HBLK.  
HBLKREP  
HBLKMASK_H1  
HBLKMASK_H2  
HBLKMASK_HL  
HBLKMASK_H3P  
HBLKTOGO1  
HBLKTOGO2  
HBLKTOGO3  
HBLKTOGO4  
HBLKTOGO5  
HBLKTOGO6  
HBLKTOGE1  
HBLKTOGE2  
HBLKTOGE3  
HBLKTOGE4  
HBLKTOGE5  
HBLKTOGE6  
High/low  
Masking polarity for H3P during 3-phase mode during HBLK.  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
0 to 8191 pixel location First HBLK toggle position for odd lines in HBLK Mode 0.  
0 to 8191 pixel location Second HBLK toggle position for odd lines in HBLK Mode 0.  
0 to 8191 pixel location Third HBLK toggle position for odd lines in HBLK Mode 0.  
0 to 8191 pixel location Fourth HBLK toggle position for odd lines in HBLK Mode 0.  
0 to 8191 pixel location Fifth HBLK toggle position for odd lines in HBLK Mode 0.  
0 to 8191 pixel location Sixth HBLK toggle position for odd lines in HBLK Mode 0.  
0 to 8191 pixel location First HBLK toggle position for even lines in HBLK Mode 0.  
0 to 8191 pixel location Second HBLK toggle position for even lines in HBLK Mode 0.  
0 to 8191 pixel location Third HBLK toggle position for even lines in HBLK Mode 0.  
0 to 8191 pixel location Fourth HBLK toggle position for even lines in HBLK Mode 0.  
0 to 8191 pixel location Fifth HBLK toggle position for even lines in HBLK Mode 0.  
0 to 8191 pixel location Sixth HBLK toggle position for even lines in HBLK Mode 0.  
0 to 15 HCLK pulses for HBLK Repeat Area 0. Number of H1 repetitions for HBLKSTARTA/B/C in  
RA0H1REPA/B/C 12  
each A, B, and C  
HBLK Mode 1 for even lines; odd lines defined using HBLKALT_PAT.  
Bits[3:0]: RA0H1REPA. Number of H1 pulses following HBLKSTARTA.  
Bits[7:4]: RA0H1REPB. Number of H1 pulses following HBLKSTARTB.  
Bits[11:8]: RA0H1REPC. Number of H1 pulses following HBLKSTARTC.  
RA1H1REPA/B/C 12  
RA2H1REPA/B/C 12  
RA3H1REPA/B/C 12  
RA4H1REPA/B/C 12  
RA5H1REPA/B/C 12  
RA0H2REPA/B/C 12  
0 to 15 HCLK pulses  
0 to 15 HCLK pulses  
0 to 15 HCLK pulses  
0 to 15 HCLK pulses  
0 to 15 HCLK pulses  
HBLK Repeat Area 1. Number of H1 repetitions for HBLKSTARTA/B/C.  
HBLK Repeat Area 2. Number of H1 repetitions for HBLKSTARTA/B/C.  
HBLK Repeat Area 3. Number of H1 repetitions for HBLKSTARTA/B/C.  
HBLK Repeat Area 4. Number of H1 repetitions for HBLKSTARTA/B/C.  
HBLK Repeat Area 5. Number of H1 repetitions for HBLKSTARTA/B/C.  
0 to 15 HCLK pulses for HBLK Repeat Area 0. Number of H2 repetitions for HBLKSTARTA/B/C in  
each A, B, and C  
HBLK Mode 1 for even lines; odd lines defined using HBLKALT_PAT.  
Bits[3:0]: RA0H2REPA. Number of H2 pulses following HBLKSTARTA.  
Bits[7:4]: RA0H2REPB. Number of H2 pulses following HBLKSTARTB.  
Bits[11:8]: RA0H2REPC. Number of H2 pulses following HBLKSTARTC.  
RA1H2REPA/B/C 12  
RA2H2REPA/B/C 12  
RA3H2REPA/B/C 12  
RA4H2REPA/B/C 12  
RA5H2REPA/B/C 12  
0 to 15 HCLK pulses  
0 to 15 HCLK pulses  
0 to 15 HCLK pulses  
0 to 15 HCLK pulses  
0 to 15 HCLK pulses  
HBLK Repeat Area 1. Number of H2 repetitions for HBLKSTARTA/B/C.  
HBLK Repeat Area 2. Number of H2 repetitions for HBLKSTARTA/B/C.  
HBLK Repeat Area 3. Number of H2 repetitions for HBLKSTARTA/B/C.  
HBLK Repeat Area 4. Number of H2 repetitions for HBLKSTARTA/B/C.  
HBLK Repeat Area 5. Number of H2 repetitions for HBLKSTARTA/B/C.  
Rev. B | Page 26 of 112  
 
AD9920A  
Length  
(Bits)  
Register  
Range  
Description  
HBLKSTARTA  
HBLKSTARTB  
HBLKSTARTC  
HBLKALT_PAT0  
13  
13  
13  
3
0 to 8191 pixel location HBLK Repeat Area Start Position A for HBLK Mode 1. Set to 8191 if not used.  
0 to 8191 pixel location HBLK Repeat Area Start Position B for HBLK Mode 1. Set to 8191 if not used.  
0 to 8191 pixel location HBLK Repeat Area Start Position C for HBLK Mode 1. Set to 8191 if not used.  
0 to 5 even repeat area HBLK Mode 1, Repeat Area 0 pattern for odd lines. Selected from previously  
defined even line repeat areas.  
HBLKALT_PAT1  
HBLKALT_PAT2  
HBLKALT_PAT3  
HBLKALT_PAT4  
HBLKALT_PAT5  
3
3
3
3
3
0 to 5 even repeat area HBLK Mode 1, Repeat Area 1 pattern for odd lines.  
0 to 5 even repeat area HBLK Mode 1, Repeat Area 2 pattern for odd lines.  
0 to 5 even repeat area HBLK Mode 1, Repeat Area 3 pattern for odd lines.  
0 to 5 even repeat area HBLK Mode 1, Repeat Area 4 pattern for odd lines.  
0 to 5 even repeat area HBLK Mode 1, Repeat Area 5 pattern for odd lines.  
1 PIXEL  
1 PIXEL  
1 PIXEL  
1 PIXEL  
B1  
A1  
PHASE 1  
A2  
B2  
PHASE 2  
PHASE 3  
B3  
A3  
INTERNAL  
DIGITAL  
CLOCK  
A
MASTER  
BLANKING  
SIGNAL  
B
MASK LEVEL = HIGH  
H1/H2  
H5/H6  
H7/H8  
MASK LEVEL = LOW  
MASK LEVEL = HIGH  
BLANKING  
Figure 33. Example of Correct HBLK Behavior  
Figure 33 shows the desired HBLK behavior for all three phases  
when the internal digital clock is located before the Phase 3 rising  
edge. Figure 34 shows the effect of changing the internal clock  
phase (changing SHDLOC) to a different location. This causes  
incorrect blanking on Phase 1 and Phase 2.  
HBLK Fine Retime Control  
An additional set of register bits is available for use during  
3-phase HCLK mode to provide fine adjustment of each HCLK  
phase during the HBLK interval. The fine retime bits (Address 0x35,  
Bits[23:20]) allow for the adjustment of the correct number of  
HCLK cycles during the HBLK interval.  
Figure 35 shows how the fine retime bits for Phase 1 and Phase 2  
are used to generate the correct blanking behavior, matching the  
result shown in Figure 33.  
Figure 33 through Figure 35 show the different settings that can  
be used based on the location of the HBLK toggle positions, the  
location of the internal digital clock, and the masking polarity  
of the different HCLK phases. By using the fine retime bits, the  
exact pulse behavior for each HCLK phase can be generated.  
Rev. B | Page 27 of 112  
 
AD9920A  
1 PIXEL  
1 PIXEL  
1 PIXEL  
1 PIXEL  
1 PIXEL  
A1  
B1  
PHASE 1  
PHASE 2  
PHASE 3  
B2  
A2  
A3  
B3  
INTERNAL  
DIGITAL  
CLOCK  
A
B
MASTER  
BLANKING  
SIGNAL  
MASK LEVEL = HIGH  
H1/H2  
H5/H6  
H7/H8  
MASK LEVEL = LOW  
MASK LEVEL = HIGH  
BLANKING  
Figure 34. Incorrect HBLK Behavior Caused by Internal Clock Position  
1 PIXEL  
1 PIXEL  
1 PIXEL  
1 PIXEL  
1 PIXEL  
FINE RETIME  
B1  
FINE RETIME  
PHASE 1  
A1  
FINE RETIME  
FINE RETIME  
A3  
PHASE 2  
PHASE 3  
A2  
B2  
B3  
INTERNAL  
DIGITAL  
CLOCK  
A
B
MASTER  
BLANKING  
SIGNAL  
MASK LEVEL = HIGH  
H1/H2  
H5/H6  
MASK LEVEL = LOW  
MASK LEVEL = HIGH  
H7/H8  
BLANKING  
Figure 35. Fine Retime on Phase 2 to Achieve Correct HBLK  
Rev. B | Page 28 of 112  
 
 
AD9920A  
HBLK Mode 1 Operation  
Increasing H-Clock Width During HBLK  
HBLK Mode 1 allows more advanced HBLK pattern operation.  
If multiple areas of HCLK pulses that are unevenly spaced from  
one another are needed, HBLK Mode 1 can be used. Using a  
separate set of registers, HBLK Mode 1 can divide the HBLK  
region into up to six repeat areas (see Table 12).  
The AD9920A allows the H1 to H8 pulse width to be increased  
during the HBLK interval. As shown in Figure 36, the H-clock fre-  
quency can be reduced by a factor of 1/2, 1/4, 1/6, 1/8, 1/10, 1/12,  
and so on, up to 1/30. To enable this feature, the HCLK_WIDTH  
register (Address 0x35, Bits[7:4]) is set to a value between 1 and 15.  
When this register is set to 0, the wide HCLK feature is disabled.  
The reduced frequency occurs for only the H1 to H8 pulses that  
are located within the HBLK area.  
As shown in Figure 37, each repeat area shares a common  
group of toggle positions: HBLKSTARTA, HBLKSTARTB, and  
HBLKSTARTC. However, the number of toggles following a start  
position can be unique in each repeat area by using the RAxH1REP  
and RAxH2REP registers; these registers, depending on the mode  
of operation, are stored in the HBLKTOGO1 to HBLKTOGO6  
and HBLKTOGE1 to HBLKTOGE6 registers (Address 0x19 to  
Address 0x1E; see Table 63).  
The HCLK_WIDTH register is generally used in conjunction  
with special HBLK patterns to generate vertical and horizontal  
mixing in the CCD.  
Table 13. HCLK Width Register  
Register  
Length (Bits)  
Description  
HCLK_WIDTH  
4
Controls the H1 to H8 pulse widths during HBLK as a fraction of pixel rate  
0 = same frequency as pixel rate; 1 = 1/2 pixel frequency (doubles the HCLK pulse width);  
2 = 1/4 pixel frequency; 3 = 1/6 pixel frequency; 4 = 1/8 pixel frequency;  
5 = 1/10 pixel frequency; 15 = 1/30 pixel frequency  
HBLK  
H1/H3  
H2/H4  
1/f  
PIX  
2 × (1/f  
)
PIX  
H-CLOCK FREQUENCY CAN BE REDUCED DURING HBLK BY 1/2 (AS SHOWN),  
1/4, 1/6, 1/8, 1/10, 1/12, AND SO ON, UP TO 1/30 USING HBLK_WIDTH REGISTER.  
Figure 36. Generating Wide H-Clock Pulses During HBLK Interval  
CREATE UP TO THREE GROUPS OF TOGGLES  
(A, B, C) COMMON IN ALL REPEAT AREAS  
HD  
CHANGE NUMBER OF A, B, C PULSES IN ANY  
REPEAT AREA USING RAxHxREPx REGISTERS  
MASK A, B, C PULSES IN ANY REPEAT  
AREA BY SETTING RAxHxREPx = 0  
A
B
C
H1  
H2  
REPEAT AREA 0  
REPEAT AREA 3  
REPEAT AREA 1 REPEAT AREA 2  
REPEAT AREA 4 REPEAT AREA 5  
HBLKEND  
HBLKSTART  
Figure 37. HBLK Mode 1 Registers  
Rev. B | Page 29 of 112  
 
 
 
AD9920A  
HD  
HBLKLEN  
HBLK  
HBLKSTARTA  
HBLKSTARTB  
ALL RAxHxREPA/B/C REGISTERS = 2 TO CREATE TWO HCLK PULSES  
HBLKSTARTC  
H1  
H2  
RA0H1REPB  
RA0H1REPC  
RA0H2REPC  
RA1H1REPA  
RA1H1REPB  
RA0H1REPA  
RA0H2REPA  
RA1H1REPC  
HBLKSTART  
RA1H2REPA RA1H2REPB  
RA1H2REPC  
RA0H2REPB  
HBLKEND  
REPEAT AREA 0  
REPEAT AREA 1  
HBLKREP = 2  
TO CREATE TWO REPEAT AREAS  
Figure 38. HBLK Mode 1 Operation  
As shown in Figure 38, setting the RAxH1REPA/B/C or  
RAxH2REPA/B/C register to 0 masks HCLK groups from  
appearing in a particular repeat area. Figure 37 shows only two  
repeat areas being used, although six are available. It is possible  
to program a separate number of repeat area repetitions for H1  
and H2, but generally the same value is used for both H1 and  
H2. Figure 37 shows an example of RA0H1REPA/B/C =  
RA0H2REPA/B/C = RA1H1REPA/B/C = RA1H2REPA/B/C = 2.  
Figure 40 shows the basic sequence to be used during the  
effective pixel readout. The 48 OB pixels at the end of each line  
are used for the CLPOB signals. PBLK is optional and is often  
used to blank the digital outputs during the HBLK time. HBLK  
is used during the vertical shift interval.  
Because PBLK is used to isolate the CDS input (see the Analog  
Preblanking section), the PBLK signal should not be used  
during CLPOB operation. The change in the offset behavior  
that occurs during PBLK affects the accuracy of the CLPOB  
circuitry.  
Furthermore, HBLK Mode 1 allows a different HBLK pattern on  
even and odd lines. The HBLKSTARTA/B/C registers, as well as  
the RAxH1REPA/B/C and RAxH2REPA/B/C registers, define  
operation for the even lines. For separate control of the odd lines,  
the HBLKALT_PAT registers specify up to six repeat areas on  
the odd lines by reordering the repeat areas used for the even  
lines. New patterns are not available, but the order of the pre-  
viously defined repeat areas on the even lines can be changed  
for the odd lines to accommodate advanced CCD operation.  
The HBLK, CLPOB, and PBLK parameters are programmed  
in the V-sequence registers. More elaborate clamping schemes,  
such as adding a separate sequence to clamp in the entire shield  
OB lines, can be used. This requires configuring a separate  
V-sequence for clocking out the OB lines.  
The CLPMASK registers are also useful for disabling the CLPOB  
on a few lines without affecting the setup of the clamping  
sequences. It is important that CLPOB be used only during  
valid OB pixels. During other portions on the frame timing,  
such as vertical blanking or SG line timing, the CCD does not  
output valid OB pixels. Any CLPOB pulse that occurs during  
this time causes errors in clamping operation and changes in  
the black level of the image.  
HORIZONTAL TIMING SEQUENCE EXAMPLE  
Figure 39 shows an example CCD layout. The horizontal register  
contains 28 dummy pixels that occur on each line clocked from  
the CCD. In the vertical direction, there are 10 optical black  
(OB) lines at the front of the readout and two at the back of the  
readout. The horizontal direction has four OB pixels in the  
front and 48 OB pixels in the back.  
Rev. B | Page 30 of 112  
 
 
 
AD9920A  
2 VERTICAL  
OB LINES  
V
EFFECTIVE IMAGE AREA  
10 VERTICAL  
OB LINES  
H
48 OB PIXELS  
4 OB PIXELS  
HORIZONTAL CCD REGISTER  
28 DUMMY PIXELS  
Figure 39. Example CCD Configuration  
OPTICAL BLACK  
OPTICAL BLACK  
HD  
CCD OUTPUT  
VERTICAL SHIFT  
DUMMY  
EFFECTIVE PIXELS  
OPTICAL BLACK  
VERTICAL SHIFT  
SHP  
SHD  
H1/H3/H5/H7  
H2/H4/H6/H8  
HBLK  
PBLK  
CLPOB  
NOTES  
1. PBLK ACTIVE (LOW) SHOULD NOT BE USED DURING CLPOB ACTIVE (LOW).  
Figure 40. Horizontal Sequence Example  
Rev. B | Page 31 of 112  
 
 
AD9920A  
2. The V-pattern groups are used to build the V-sequences  
where additional information is added.  
VERTICAL TIMING GENERATION  
The AD9920A provides a flexible solution for generating vertical  
CCD timing and can support multiple CCDs and different system  
architectures. The vertical transfer clocks are used to shift each  
line of pixels into the horizontal output register of the CCD. The  
AD9920A allows these outputs to be individually programmed  
into various readout configurations by using a four-step process.  
3. The readout for an entire field is constructed by dividing  
the field into regions and then assigning a sequence to each  
region. Each field can contain up to nine different regions  
to accommodate the various steps of the readout, such as  
high speed line shifts and unique vertical line transfers.  
The total number of V-patterns, V-sequences, and fields is  
programmable but limited by the number of registers.  
4. The mode registers allow the different fields to be combined  
in any order for various readout configurations.  
Figure 41 shows an overview of how the vertical timing is  
generated in four steps.  
1. The individual pulse patterns for XV1 to XV24 are created  
by using the vertical pattern group registers.  
CREATE THE VERTICAL PATTERN GROUPS,  
UP TO FOUR TOGGLE POSITIONS FOR EACH OUTPUT.  
BUILD THE V-SEQUENCES BY ADDING START POLARITY,  
1
2
LINE START POSITION, NUMBER OF REPEATS, ALTERNATION,  
GROUP A/B/C/D INFORMATION, AND HBLK/CLPOB PULSES.  
XV1  
XV2  
XV1  
XV2  
XV3  
XV3  
VPAT0  
V-SEQUENCE 0  
(VPAT0, 1 REP)  
XV23  
XV24  
XV23  
XV24  
XV1  
XV2  
XV1  
XV2  
XV3  
V-SEQUENCE 1  
(VPAT1, 2 REP)  
XV3  
VPAT1  
XV23  
XV24  
XV23  
XV24  
XV1  
XV2  
XV3  
V-SEQUENCE 2  
(VPAT1, N REP)  
XV23  
XV24  
USE THE MODE REGISTERS TO CONTROL WHICH FIELDS  
ARE USED AND IN WHAT ORDER (MAXIMUM OF SEVEN  
FIELDS CAN BE COMBINED IN ANY ORDER).  
BUILD EACH FIELD BY DIVIDING INTO DIFFERENT REGIONS  
AND ASSIGNING A DIFFERENT V-SEQUENCE TO EACH  
(MAXIMUM OF NINE REGIONS IN EACH FIELD).  
4
3
FIELD1  
FIELD2  
FIELD4  
FIELD1  
FIELD3  
FIELD1  
FIELD3  
FIELD5  
REGION 0: USE V-SEQUENCE 2  
REGION 1: USE V-SEQUENCE 0  
REGION 2: USE V-SEQUENCE 3  
REGION 3: USE V-SEQUENCE 0  
FIELD2  
FIELD4  
REGION 4: USE V-SEQUENCE 2  
FIELD2  
FIELD3  
Figure 41. Summary of Vertical Timing Generation  
Rev. B | Page 32 of 112  
 
 
 
AD9920A  
The VSTART position is actually an offset value for each toggle  
position. The actual pixel location for each toggle, measured  
from the HD falling edge (Pixel 0), is equal to the VSTART  
value plus the toggle position.  
Vertical Pattern Groups (VPAT)  
The vertical pattern groups define the individual pulse patterns  
for each XV1 to XV24 output signal. Table 14 summarizes the  
registers available for generating each V-pattern group. The first,  
second, third, and fourth toggle positions (VTOG1, VTOG2,  
VTOG3, and VTOG4) are the pixel locations within the line  
where the pulse transitions. All toggle positions are 13-bit  
values, allowing their placement anywhere in the first 8191  
pixels of the line.  
When the selected V-output is designated as a VSG pulse, either  
the VTOG1/VTOG2 or VTOG3/VTOG4 pair is selected using  
V-Sequence Address 0x03, VSGPATSEL. All four toggle positions  
are not simultaneously available for VSG pulses.  
All unused V-channels must have their toggle positions  
programmed to either 0 or maximum value. This prevents  
unpredictable behavior because the default values of the  
V-pattern group registers are unknown.  
More registers are included in the vertical sequence registers to  
specify the output pulses. VPOL specifies the start polarity for  
each signal; VSTART specifies the start position of the V-pattern  
group within the line; VLEN designates the total length of the  
V-pattern group, which determines the number of pixels between  
each of the pattern repetitions when repetitions are used.  
Table 14. Vertical Pattern Group Registers  
Register  
VTOG1  
VTOG2  
VTOG3  
VTOG4  
Length (Bits)  
Description  
13  
13  
13  
13  
First toggle position within the line for each XV1 to XV24 output, relative to VSTART value.  
Second toggle position, relative to VSTART value.  
Third toggle position, relative to VSTART value.  
Fourth toggle position, relative to VSTART value.  
START POSITION OF VERTICAL PATTERN GROUP IS PROGRAMMABLE IN VERTICAL SEQUENCE REGISTERS.  
HD  
4
XV1  
XV2  
1
1
2
3
2
3
XV24  
1
2
3
PROGRAMMABLE SETTINGS:  
1
START POLARITY (LOCATED IN V-SEQUENCE REGISTERS).  
2
3
4
FIRST TOGGLE POSITION.  
SECOND TOGGLE POSITION (THIRD AND FOURTH TOGGLE POSITIONS ALSO AVAILABLE FOR MORE COMPLEX PATTERNS).  
TOTAL PATTERN LENGTH FOR ALL VERTICAL OUTPUTS (LOCATED IN VERTICAL SEQUENCE REGISTERS).  
Figure 42. Vertical Pattern Group Programmability  
Rev. B | Page 33 of 112  
 
AD9920A  
Generally, the same number of repetitions is programmed into  
both registers. If a different number of repetitions is required on  
odd and even lines, separate values can be used for each register  
(see the Generating Line Alternation for V-Sequences and HBLK  
section). The VSTARTA, VSTARTB, VSTARTC, and VSTARTD  
registers specify where in the line the V-pattern group starts.  
The VMASK_EVEN and VMASK_ODD registers are used in  
conjunction with the FREEZE/RESUME registers to enable  
optional masking of the V-outputs. One or more of the  
VERTICAL SEQUENCES (VSEQ)  
The vertical sequences are created by selecting one of the V-pattern  
groups and adding repeats, start position, horizontal clamping, and  
blanking information. The V-sequences are programmed using  
the registers shown in Table 15. Figure 43 shows an example of  
how these registers are used to generate the V-sequences.  
The VPATSELA, VPATSELB, VPATSELC, and VPATSELD  
registers select which V-pattern is used in a given V-sequence.  
Having four groups available allows each vertical output to be  
mapped to a different V-pattern. The user can add repetitions to  
the selected V-pattern group for high speed line shifts or for line  
binning by using the VREP registers for odd and even lines.  
FREEZE1/RESUME1, FREEZE2/RESUME2, FREEZE3/  
RESUME3, and FREEZE4/RESUME4 registers can be enabled.  
The line length (in pixels) is programmable using the HDLEN  
registers. Each V-sequence can have a different line length to  
accommodate various image readout techniques. The maximum  
number of pixels per line is 8192. The last line of the field is  
programmed separately using the HDLASTLEN register, which  
is located in the field register section (see Table 64).  
1
HD  
2
3
4
4
XV1 TO XV24  
CLPOB  
VREPA_3  
V-PATTERN GROUP  
VREPA_ 2  
5
6
HBLK  
PROGRAMMABLE SETTINGS FOR EACH VERTICAL SEQUENCE:  
1
START POSITION IN THE LINE OF THE SELECTED V-PATTERN GROUP.  
HD LINE LENGTH.  
V-PATTERN SELECT (VPATSEL) TO SELECT ANY V-PATTERN GROUP.  
NUMBER OF REPETITIONS OF THE V-PATTERN GROUP (IF NEEDED).  
START POLARITY AND TOGGLE POSITIONS FOR CLPOB AND PBLK SIGNALS.  
MASKING POLARITY AND TOGGLE POSITIONS FOR HBLK SIGNAL.  
2
3
4
5
6
Figure 43. V-Sequence Programmability  
Rev. B | Page 34 of 112  
 
 
AD9920A  
Table 15. Summary of V-Sequence Registers (see Table 11 and Table 12 for the CLPOB, PBLK, and HBLK Register Summary)  
Length  
(Bits)  
Register  
Description  
HOLD  
4
Use in conjunction with VMASK_EVEN and VMASK_ODD.  
1 = Enable HOLD function instead of FREEZE/RESUME function.  
CONCAT_GRP  
VREP_MODE  
4
Combines toggle positions of Group A, Group B, Group C, and Group D when enabled. Only Group A settings  
for start, polarity, length, and repetition are used when this mode is selected.  
0 = disable.  
1 = enable the addition of all toggle positions from VPATSELA/B/C/D.  
2 to 15 = test mode only; do not use.  
2
Selects line alternation for V-output repetitions. Two separate controls: one for Group A and the other for  
Group B, Group C, and Group D.  
0 = disable alternation. Group A uses VREPA_1, Groups B/C/D use VREP_EVEN for all lines.  
1 = two-line. Group A alternates VREPA_1 and VREPA_2. Groups B/C/D alternate VREP_EVEN and VREP_ODD.  
2 = three-line. Group A alternates VREPA_1, VREPA_2, and VREPA_3. Groups B/C/D follow a VREP_EVEN,  
VREP_ODD, VREP_ODD, VREP_EVEN, VREP_ODD, VREP_ODD pattern.  
3 = four-line. Group A alternates VREPA_1, VREPA_2, VREPA_3, and VREPA_4. Groups B/C/D follow two-line  
alternation.  
LASTREPLEN_EN  
4
Enable a separate pattern length to be used during the last repetition of the V-sequence. One bit for each  
group (A, B, C, and D); Group A is the LSB. Set bit high to enable. Recommended value is enabled.  
HDLENE  
HDLENO  
VPOL  
14  
14  
24  
24  
HD line length for even lines in the V-sequence.  
HD line length for odd lines in the V-sequence.  
Group A start polarity bits for each XV1 to XV24 signal.  
GROUPSEL_0  
Assigns each XV1 to XV12 signal to Group A, Group B, Group C, or Group D. Two bits for each signal.  
Bits[1:0] are for XV1.  
Bits[3:2] are for XV2.  
Bits[23:22] are for XV12.  
0 = assign to Group A.  
1 = assign to Group B.  
2 = assign to Group C.  
3 = assign to Group D.  
GROUPSEL_1  
24  
Assigns each XV13 to XV24 signal to Group A, Group B, Group C, or Group D. Two bits for each signal.  
Bits[1:0] are for XV13.  
Bits[3:2] are for XV14.  
Bits[23:22] are for XV24.  
0 = assign to Group A.  
1 = assign to Group B.  
2 = assign to Group C.  
3 = assign to Group D.  
VPATSELA  
VPATSELB  
VPATSELC  
VPATSELD  
VSTARTA  
VSTARTB  
VSTARTC  
VSTARTD  
VLENA  
5
Selected V-pattern for Group A.  
5
Selected V-pattern for Group B.  
5
Selected V-pattern for Group C.  
5
Selected V-pattern for Group D.  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
Start position for the selected V-pattern Group A.  
Start position for the selected V-pattern Group B.  
Start position for the selected V-pattern Group C.  
Start position for the selected V-pattern Group D.  
Length of selected V-pattern Group A.  
VLENB  
Length of selected V-pattern Group B.  
VLENC  
Length of selected V-pattern Group C.  
VLEND  
Length of selected V-pattern Group D.  
VREPA_1  
VREPA_2  
VREPA_3  
VREPA_4  
Number of repetitions for the V-pattern Group A for first lines (even).  
Number of repetitions for the V-pattern Group A for second lines (odd).  
Number of repetitions for the V-pattern Group A for third lines.  
Number of repetitions for the V-pattern Group A for fourth lines.  
Rev. B | Page 35 of 112  
 
AD9920A  
Length  
(Bits)  
Register  
Description  
VREPB_ODD  
VREPC_ODD  
VREPD_ODD  
VREPB_EVEN  
VREPC_EVEN  
VREPD_EVEN  
FREEZE1  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
Number of repetitions for the V-pattern Group B for odd lines.  
Number of repetitions for the V-pattern Group C for odd lines.  
Number of repetitions for the V-pattern Group D for odd lines.  
Number of repetitions for the V-pattern Group B for even lines.  
Number of repetitions for the V-pattern Group C for even lines.  
Number of repetitions for the V-pattern Group D for even lines.  
Pixel location where the V-outputs freeze or hold (see VMASK_EVEN and VMASK_ODD). Also used as  
VALTSEL0_EVEN, Bits[12:0] register when special VSEQALT_EN mode is enabled.  
FREEZE2  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
13  
Pixel location where the V-outputs freeze or hold (see VMASK_EVEN and VMASK_ODD). Also used as  
VALTSEL1_EVEN, Bits[12:0] register when special VSEQALT_EN mode is enabled.  
FREEZE3  
Pixel location where the V-outputs freeze or hold (see VMASK_EVEN and VMASK_ODD). Also used as  
VALTSEL0_ODD, Bits[12:0] register when special VSEQALT_EN mode is enabled.  
FREEZE4  
Pixel location where the V-outputs freeze or hold (see VMASK_EVEN and VMASK_ODD). Also used as  
VALTSEL1_ODD, Bits[12:0] register when special VSEQALT_EN mode is enabled.  
RESUME1  
Pixel location where the V-outputs resume operation (see VMASK_EVEN and VMASK_ODD). Also used as  
VALTSEL0_EVEN, Bits[17:13] register when special VSEQALT_EN mode is enabled.  
RESUME2  
Pixel location where the V-outputs resume operation (see VMASK_EVEN and VMASK_ODD). Also used as  
VALTSEL1_EVEN, Bits[17:13] register when special VSEQALT_EN mode is enabled.  
RESUME3  
Pixel location where the V-outputs resume operation (see VMASK_EVEN and VMASK_ODD). Also used as  
VALTSEL0_ODD, Bits[17:13] register when special VSEQALT_EN mode is enabled.  
RESUME4  
Pixel location where the V-outputs resume operation (see VMASK_EVEN and VMASK_ODD). Also used as  
VALTSEL1_ODD, Bits[17:13] register when special VSEQALT_EN mode is enabled.  
LASTREPLEN_A  
LASTREPLEN_B  
LASTREPLEN_C  
LASTREPLEN_D  
Separate length for last repetition of vertical pulses for Group A. Must be enabled using LASTREPLEN_EN.  
Should be programmed to a value equal to the VLENA register.  
Separate length for last repetition of vertical pulses for Group B. Must be enabled using LASTREPLEN_EN.  
Should be programmed to a value equal to the VLENB register.  
Separate length for last repetition of vertical pulses for Group C. Must be enabled using LASTREPLEN_EN.  
Should be programmed to a value equal to the VLENC register.  
Separate length for last repetition of vertical pulses for Group D. Must be enabled using LASTREPLEN_EN.  
Should be programmed to a value equal to the VLEND register.  
VSEQALT_EN  
1
Special V-sequence alternation mode is enabled when this register is programmed high.  
VALTSEL0_EVEN  
18  
Select lines for special V-sequence alternation mode for even lines. Used to concatenate VPAT Group A, Group B,  
Group C, and Group D into unique merged patterns. Setting is used to specify one segment, with up to a maxi-  
mum of 18 segments. (The FREEZE/RESUME registers function as VALTSEL when VSEQALT_EN is enabled.)  
VALTSEL1_EVEN  
VALTSEL0_ODD  
VALTSEL1_ODD  
SPC_PAT_EN  
18  
18  
18  
3
Select lines for special V-sequence alternation mode for even lines. Used to concatenate VPAT Group A, Group B,  
Group C, and Group D into unique merged patterns. Setting is used to specify one segment, with up to a maxi-  
mum of 18 segments. (The FREEZE/RESUME registers function as VALTSEL when VSEQALT_EN is enabled.)  
Select lines for special V-sequence alternation mode for odd lines. Used to concatenate VPAT Group A, Group B,  
Group C, and Group D into unique merged patterns. Setting is used to specify one segment, with up to a maxi-  
mum of 18 segments. (The FREEZE/RESUME registers function as VALTSEL when VSEQALT_EN is enabled.)  
Select lines for special V-sequence alternation mode for odd lines. Used to concatenate VPAT Group A, Group B,  
Group C, and Group D into unique merged patterns. Setting is used to specify one segment, with up to a maxi-  
mum of 18 segments. (The FREEZE/RESUME registers function as VALTSEL when VSEQALT_EN is enabled.)  
Enable special V-pattern to be inserted into one repetition of a VPATA series.  
SPC_PAT_EN, Bit 0: set to 1 to enable VPATB to be used as special pattern insertion.  
SPC_PAT_EN, Bit 1: set to 1 to enable VPATC to be used as special pattern insertion.  
SPC_PAT_EN, Bit 2: set to 1 to enable VPATD to be used as special pattern insertion.  
SEQ_ALT_INC  
SEQ_ALT_RST  
1
1
0 = normal operation.  
1 = automatically increments the sequence number at the end of the line, unless a sequence change  
position boundary is reached.  
0 = normal operation.  
1 = automatically resets the sequence number back to the sequence defined for that particular region in the  
active field register.  
Rev. B | Page 36 of 112  
AD9920A  
HD  
XV1  
XV8  
XV1 TO XV8 USE  
V-PATTERN GROUP A  
XV9, XV10 USE  
V-PATTERN GROUP B  
XV9  
XV10  
Figure 44. Using Separate Group A and Group B Patterns  
HD  
V-PATTERN GROUP A  
V-PATTERN GROUP B  
V-PATTERN GROUP C  
V-PATTERN GROUP D  
XV1  
XV24  
Figure 45. Combining Multiple V-Patterns Using CONCAT_GRP = 1  
HD  
V-PATTERN GROUP A  
V-PATTERN GROUP B  
XV1  
XV10  
GROUP A REP 1  
GROUP A REP 2  
GROUP A REP 3  
Figure 46. Combining Group A and Group B Patterns with Repetition  
Group A/Group B/Group C/Group D Selection  
If additional flexibility is needed, some outputs can be set to  
Group B, Group C, or Group D in the GROUPSEL registers. In  
this case, those selected outputs use the V-pattern group specified  
by the VPATSELB, VPATSELC, or VPATSELD registers. Figure 44  
shows an example where the V9 and V10 outputs use a separate  
V-pattern Group B to perform special CCD timing.  
The AD9920A has the flexibility to use four different V-pattern  
groups in a vertical sequence. In general, the vertical outputs  
use the same V-pattern group during a particular sequence. It  
is possible to assign some of the outputs to a different V-pattern  
group, which can be useful in certain CCD readout modes.  
Another application of the Group A, Group B, Group C, and  
Group D registers is to combine up to four different V-pattern  
groups together for more complex patterns. This is accom-  
plished by setting the CONCAT_GRP register (Address 0x00,  
Bits[13:10]) equal to 0x01. This setting combines the toggle  
positions from the V-pattern groups specified by registers  
VPATSELA, VPATSELB, VPATSELC, and VPATSELD for a  
maximum of up to 16 toggle positions. Example timing for the  
CONCAT_GRP = 1 feature is shown in Figure 45.  
The GROUPSEL registers are used to select the group (A, B, C,  
or D) for each V-output. In general, only a single V-pattern  
group is needed for the vertical outputs; therefore, Group A  
should be selected for all outputs by default (GROUPSEL_0,  
GROUPSEL_1 = 0x00). In this configuration, all outputs use  
the V-pattern group specified by the VPATSELA register.  
Rev. B | Page 37 of 112  
 
 
AD9920A  
If only two groups are needed (up to eight toggle positions) for  
the specified timing, the VPATSELB, VPATSELC, and VPATSELD  
registers can be programmed to the same value. If only three  
groups are needed, VPATSELC and VPATSELD can be  
programmed to the same value. Following this approach  
conserves register memory if the four separate V-patterns are  
not needed.  
Table 16. VALTSEL Bit Settings for Even and Odd Lines  
Parameter  
VALTSEL Bit Settings  
VALTSEL0_EVEN  
VALTSEL1_EVEN  
VALTSEL0_ODD  
VALTSEL1_ODD  
Resulting Pattern for Even Lines  
Resulting Pattern for Odd Lines  
0
0
0
0
A
A
0
1
0
1
B
B
1
0
1
0
C
C
1
1
1
1
D
D
Note that when CONCAT_GRP is enabled, the Group A  
settings are used only for start position, polarity, length, and  
repetitions. All toggle positions for Group A, Group B, Group C,  
and Group D are combined together and applied using the  
settings in the VSTARTA, VPOL, VLENA, and VREPA registers.  
When the entire pattern is divided, program VALTSEL0 (even  
and odd), Bits[17:0] and VALTSEL1 (even and odd), Bits[17:0]  
so that the segments are concatenated in the desired order. If  
separate odd and even lines are not required, set the odd and  
even registers to the same value.  
Special Vertical Sequence Alternation (SVSA) Mode  
The AD9920A has additional flexibility for combining four  
different V-pattern groups in a random sequence that can be  
programmed for specific CCD requirements. This mode of  
operation allows custom vertical sequences for CCDs that  
require more complex vertical timing patterns. For example,  
using the special vertical sequence alternation mode, it is  
possible to support random pattern concatenation, with  
additional support for odd/even line alternation.  
Figure 49 illustrates the process of using six vertical pattern  
segments that are concatenated into a small, merged pattern.  
Program the register VREPA_1 to specify the number of segments  
that are concatenated into each merged pattern. The maximum  
number of segments that can be concatenated to create a merged  
pattern is 18. Program VLENA, VLENB, VLENC, and VLEND  
to be of equal length. Finally, program HBLK to generate the  
proper H-clock timing using the procedure described in the  
HBLK Mode 1 Operation section.  
Figure 47 illustrates four common and repetitive vertical pattern  
segments, A through D, that are derived from the complete  
vertical pattern. Figure 48 illustrates how each group can be  
concatenated together in an arbitrary order.  
It is important to note that because the FREEZE/RESUME registers  
are used to specify the VALTSEL registers, it is impossible to use  
both the FREEZE/RESUME functions and the SVSA mode.  
To enable the SVSA mode, write the VSEQALT_EN bit,  
Address 0x00, Bit 6 in the V-sequence registers, equal to 0x01.  
This enables the FREEZE/RESUME registers to function as  
VALTSEL registers.  
Table 17. VALTSEL Register Locations  
Function of FREEZE/  
RESUME Registers When  
VSEQALT_EN = 1  
Register Location  
To create SVSA timing, divide the complete vertical timing  
pattern into four common and repetitive segments. Identify the  
related segments as VPATA, VPATB, VPATC, or VPATD. Up to  
four toggle positions for each segment can be programmed using  
the V-pattern registers.  
VALTSEL0_EVEN, Bits[12:0]  
VSEQ register FREEZE1, Bits[12:0]  
VALTSEL0_EVEN, Bits[17:13] VSEQ register RESUME1, Bits[17:13]  
VALTSEL1_EVEN, Bits[12:0] VSEQ register FREEZE2, Bits[12:0]  
VALTSEL1_EVEN, Bits[17:13] VSEQ register RESUME2, Bits[17:13]  
VALTSEL0_ODD, Bits[12:0] VSEQ register FREEZE3, Bits[12:0]  
VALTSEL0_ODD, Bits[17:13] VSEQ register RESUME3, Bits[17:13]  
VALTSEL1_ODD, Bits[12:0] VSEQ register FREEZE4, Bits[12:0]  
VALTSEL1_ODD, Bits[17:13] VSEQ register RESUME4, Bits[17:13]  
Table 16 shows how the segments are specified using a 2-bit  
representation. Each bit from VALTSEL0 and VALTSEL1 is  
combined to produce four values, corresponding to Pattern A,  
Pattern B, Pattern C, and Pattern D.  
Rev. B | Page 38 of 112  
 
 
AD9920A  
V-PATTERN A  
V-PATTERN B  
V-PATTERN C  
V-PATTERN D  
XV1  
XV2  
XV3  
XV23  
VLENA  
NOTES  
VLENB  
VLENC  
VLEND  
1. EACH SEGMENT MUST BE THE SAME LENGTH.  
VLENA = VLENB = VLENC = VLEND.  
Figure 47. Vertical Timing Divided into Four Segments: VPATA, VPATB, VPATC, and VPATD  
HD  
COMBINED  
V-PATTERN  
B
C
B
D
A
B
A
A
A
B
B
D
A
C
C
A
NOTES  
1. ABLE TO CONCATENATE PATTERNS TOGETHER ARBITRARILY.  
2. EACH PATTERN CAN HAVE UP TO FOUR TOGGLES PROGRAMMED.  
3. CAN CONCATENATE UP TO 18 PATTERNS INTO A MERGED PATTERN.  
4. ODD AND EVEN LINES CAN HAVE A DIFFERENT PATTERN CONCATENATION  
SPECIFIED BY VALTSEL EVEN AND ODD REGISTERS.  
Figure 48. Concatenating Each VPAT Group in an Arbitrary Order  
HD  
A
C
B
D
D
A
XV1 TO XV23  
SEGMENT 1  
SEGMENT 2  
SEGMENT 3  
SEGMENT4  
SEGMENT 5  
SEGMENT 6  
XV1  
XV2  
XV3  
XV23  
VPATA  
VPATC  
VPATB  
VPATD  
VPATD  
VPATA  
VALTSEL0_EVEN  
VALTSEL1_EVEN  
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
NOTES  
1. SIX V-PATTERN SEGMENTS CONCATENATED INTO A MERGED PATTERN.  
2. COMMON AND REPETITIVE VTP SEGMENTS DERIVED FROM THE COMPLETE VTP PATTERN.  
3. VALTSEL REGISTERS SPECIFY SEGMENT ORDER TO CREATE THE CONCATENATED MERGED PATTERN.  
Figure 49. Example of Special V-Sequence Alternation Mode Using VALTSEL Registers to Specify Segment Order  
Rev. B | Page 39 of 112  
 
 
 
AD9920A  
Using the LASTREPLEN_EN Register  
to be programmed on odd and even lines. Only the number of  
repeats can be different in odd and even lines if the V-pattern  
group remains the same. There are separate controls for the  
assigned Group A, Group B, Group C, and Group D patterns.  
All groups can support odd and even line alternation. Group A  
uses the VREPA_1 and VREPA_2 registers; Group B, Group C,  
and Group D use the corresponding VREPx_ODD and  
VREPx_EVEN registers. Using the additional VREPA_3 and  
VREPA_4 registers, Group A can also support three-line and  
four-line alternation.  
The LASTREPLEN_EN register (Address 0x00, Bits[19:16] in the  
V-sequence registers) is used to enable a separate pattern length  
to be used in the final repetition of several pulse repetitions. If a  
different last length is not required, it is still recommended that  
the LASTREPLEN_EN register bits be set high (enabled) and that  
the LASTREPLEN_A, LASTREPLEN_B, LASTREPLEN_C, and  
LASTREPLEN_D registers be set to a value equal to the VLENA,  
VLENB, VLENC, and VLEND register values, respectively.  
Generating Line Alternation for V-Sequences and HBLK  
As described in the Generating HBLK Line Alternation section,  
the HBLK signal can be alternated for odd and even lines. Figure 50  
shows an example of V-pattern group repetition alternation and  
HBLK Mode 0 alternation used together.  
During low resolution readout, some CCDs require a different  
number of vertical clocks on alternate lines. The AD9920A can  
support this requirement by using the VREP registers. These  
registers allow a different number of V-pattern group repetitions  
HD  
VREPA_1 = 2  
VREPA_2 = 5  
VREPA_1 = 2  
(OR VREPB/C/D_EVEN = 2)  
(OR VREPB/C/D_ODD = 5)  
(OR VREPB/C/D_EVEN = 2)  
XV1  
XV2  
XV24  
TOGE1  
TOGE2  
TOGO1  
TOGO2  
TOGE1  
TOGE2  
HBLK  
NOTES  
1. THE NUMBER OF REPEATS FOR V-PATTERN GROUPS A/B/C/D CAN BE ALTERNATED ON ODD AND EVEN LINES.  
2. GROUP A ALSO SUPPORTS 3- AND 4-LINE ALTERNATION USING THE ADDITIONAL VREPA_3 AND VREPA_4 REGISTERS.  
3. THE HBLK TOGGLE POSITIONS CAN BE ALTERNATED BETWEEN ODD AND EVEN LINES TO GENERATE DIFFERENT HBLK PATTERNS.  
Figure 50. Odd/Even Line Alternation of V-Pattern Group Repetitions and HBLK Toggle Positions  
Rev. B | Page 40 of 112  
 
 
AD9920A  
Vertical Masking Using the FREEZE/RESUME Registers  
Four sets of FREEZE/RESUME registers are provided, allowing  
the vertical outputs to be interrupted up to four times in the  
same line.  
As shown in Figure 51 and Figure 52, the FREEZE/RESUME  
registers are used to temporarily mask the V-outputs. The pixel  
locations to begin the masking (FREEZE) and end the masking  
(RESUME) create an area in which the vertical toggle positions  
are ignored. At the pixel location specified in the FREEZE register,  
the V-outputs are held static at their current dc state, high or low.  
The V-outputs are held until the pixel location specified by the  
RESUME register is reached, at which point the signals continue  
with any remaining toggle positions, if any exist.  
When masking is enabled, each group (Group A, Group B,  
Group C, and Group D) uses the same FREEZE/RESUME  
positions.  
Note that the FREEZE/RESUME registers are also used as the  
VALTSEL0 and VALTSEL1 registers during special vertical  
alternation mode (see the Special Vertical Sequence Alternation  
(SVSA) Mode section).  
HD  
XV1  
NO MASKING AREA  
XV24  
Figure 51. No FREEZE/RESUME  
V-MASKING AREA  
HD  
XV1  
FREEZE  
RESUME  
XV24  
NOTES  
1. ALL TOGGLE POSITIONS WITHIN THE FREEZE/RESUME MASKING AREA ARE IGNORED. H-COUNTER CONTINUES TO COUNT DURING MASKING.  
2. FOUR SEPARATE MASKING AREAS ARE AVAILABLE, USING FREEZE1/RESUME1, FREEZE2/RESUME2, FREEZE3/RESUME3, AND  
FREEZE4/RESUME4 REGISTERS.  
Figure 52. Using FREEZE/RESUME  
Rev. B | Page 41 of 112  
 
 
AD9920A  
Hold Area Using the FREEZE/RESUME Registers  
masking function in that the V-outputs continue from where  
they stopped rather than continuing from where they would  
have been. The hold area temporarily stops the pixel counter  
for the V-outputs, whereas vertical masking allows the counter  
to continue in the masking area.  
The FREEZE/RESUME registers can also be used to create a  
hold area in which the V-outputs are temporarily held and later  
continued, starting at the point where they were held. As shown  
in Figure 53, the hold area function is different from the vertical  
HD  
HOLD AREA  
FOR GROUP A  
FREEZE  
RESUME  
XV1  
XV8  
XV9  
XV10  
NOTES  
1. WHEN HOLD = 1 FOR ANY V-SEQUENCE GROUP, THE FREEZE AND RESUME REGISTERS ARE USED TO SPECIFY THE HOLD AREA.  
2. IN THIS EXAMPLE, XV1 TO XV10 ARE ASSIGNED TO GROUP A. HOLD BIT FOR GROUP A = 1.  
3. H-COUNTER FOR GROUP A (XV1 TO XV10) STOPS DURING HOLD AREA.  
Figure 53. Hold Area for Group A  
Rev. B | Page 42 of 112  
 
AD9920A  
Special Pattern Insertion  
has been added into the middle of the sequence. Figure 55  
shows more detail on how to set the registers to achieve the  
desired timing.  
Additional flexibility is available using the SPC_PAT_EN  
register bits, which allow a Group B, Group C, or Group D  
pattern to be inserted into a series of Group A repetitions. This  
feature is useful when a different pattern is needed at the start,  
middle, or end of a sequence.  
Note that VREPB is used to specify which repetition number  
has the special pattern inserted instead of VPATA. VPATB  
always has priority over VPATC or VPATD if more than one  
SPC_PAT_EN bit is enabled (that is, SPC_PAT_EN, Bit 0 has  
priority over SPC_PAT_EN, Bit 1 and Bit 2).  
Figure 54 shows an example of a sweep region using VPATA  
with multiple repetitions where a single repetition of VPATB  
VD  
SCP1  
SCP2  
HD  
LINE 0  
LINE 1  
LINE  
2
LINE 24  
LINE 25  
XV1 TO XVx  
REGION 0  
REGION 1: SWEEP REGION  
REGION 2  
PATTERN B INSERTED DURING PATTERN A REPETITIONS  
Figure 54. Special Pattern Insertion Example  
HD  
REP N  
REP 1  
REP 2  
REP 3  
REP 4  
REP 5  
XV1  
V-PATTERN A  
REGISTER SETTINGS: DESCRIPTION:  
V-PATTERN B  
V-PATTERN A  
SPC_PAT_EN[0] = 1  
VREPA = N  
VREPB = 4  
V-PATTERN B IS USED AS SPECIAL PATTERN  
TOTAL NUMBER OF REPS USED FOR SEQUENCE (N REPS)  
REP 4 USES V-PATTERN B INSTEAD OF V-PATTERN A  
NOTES  
1. VSTARTB MUST BE SET EQUAL TO VSTARTA.  
Figure 55. Special Pattern Insertion Registers  
Rev. B | Page 43 of 112  
 
 
AD9920A  
that line the sequence number automatically increments to  
Sequence 3. In the same way, at the end of that line, the  
sequence number automatically increments to Sequence 4.  
Sequence Line Alternation  
To support the timing requirements of some advanced CCDs  
in a memory-efficient manner, the AD9920A can automatically  
increment the sequence number at the end of a given line through  
the use of the SEQ_ALT_INC register (V-Sequence Register 0x09,  
Bit 20). It can also reset the sequence number to the sequence  
defined in the field register through the SEQ_ALT_RST register  
(V-Sequence Register 0x09, Bit 21). Combining these two registers  
allows the user to create a loop of sequences for a given region.  
See Figure 56 for an example of how to use these two functions  
together. The example in Figure 56 uses the register settings  
listed in Table 18.  
Because SEQ_ALT_INC = 0 and SEQ_ALT_RST = 1 for  
Sequence 4, the AD9920A automatically resets the sequence  
number to the sequence defined for that region in the field register,  
which in this case is Sequence 2. The AD9920A continues to loop  
in this fashion between Sequence 2, Sequence 3, and Sequence 4  
until it reaches the next sequence change position.  
It is important to note that the sequence number can increment  
only at the end of a line and cannot be used to create more complex  
patterns within one line. This is distinctly different from the special  
vertical sequence alternation mode, which allows the user to  
concatenate multiple sequences within one line (see the Special  
Vertical Sequence Alternation (SVSA) Mode section).  
With these settings, at Sequence Change Position 0 (SCP0),  
the AD9920A steps into Sequence 2. Because the Sequence 2  
SEQ_ALT_INC = 1 and the SEQ_ALT_RST = 0, at the end of  
Table 18. Register Settings for the Example in Figure 56  
Field Registers  
Sequence 2 Registers  
Sequence 3 Registers  
Sequence 4 Registers  
SEQ_ALT_INC = 0  
SEQ_ALT_RST = 1  
Sequence 6 Registers  
SEQ_ALT_INC = 0  
SEQ_ALT_RST = 0  
SCP0 = 0, SEQ0 = 2  
SCP1 = 6, SEQ1 = 6  
SEQ_ALT_INC = 1  
SEQ_ALT_RST = 0  
SEQ_ALT_INC = 1  
SEQ_ALT_RST = 0  
VD  
HD  
ACTIVE  
SEQUENCE #  
2
3
4
2
3
4
6
6
SCP0  
SCP1  
Figure 56. Example Output Using SEQ_ALT_INC and SEQ_ALT_RST Functions  
Rev. B | Page 44 of 112  
 
 
AD9920A  
Complete Field: Combining V-Sequences  
The HDLASTLEN register specifies the number of pixels in the  
last line of the field.  
After the V-sequences are created, they are combined to create  
different readout fields. A field consists of up to nine regions;  
within each region, a different V-sequence can be selected.  
Figure 57 shows how the sequence change positions (SCPs)  
designate the line boundary for each region and how the SEQ  
registers then select which V-sequence is used in each region.  
Registers to control the VSG outputs are also included in the  
field registers. Table 19 summarizes the registers used to create  
the various fields.  
The SGMASK register is used to enable or disable each individual  
VSG output. There are two bits for each VSG output to enable  
separate masking in SGACTLINE1 and SGACTLINE2.  
Setting a masking bit high masks the output; setting it low  
enables the output. The VSGPATSEL register assigns one of  
the eight SG patterns to each VSG output. The individual SG  
patterns are created separately using the SG pattern registers.  
The SGACTLINE1 register specifies which line in the field  
contains the VSG outputs. The optional SGACTLINE2 register  
allows VSG pulses to be output on a different line. Separate  
masking is not available for SGACTLINE1 and SGACTLINE2,  
unless separate sequences are assigned to SGACTLINE1 and  
SGACTLINE2. Note that to ensure proper SUBCK operation  
when using both SGACTLINE1 and SGACTLINE2, SGACTLINE2  
must be programmed to occur before SGACTLINE1.  
The SEQ registers, one for each region, select which of the  
V-sequences are active in each region. The MULT_SWEEP  
registers, one for each region, are used to enable sweep mode  
and/or multiplier mode in any region. The SCP registers create  
the line boundaries for each region. The VDLEN register specifies  
the total number of lines in the field. The HDLEN registers specify  
the total number of pixels per line.  
Table 19. Field Registers (CLPOB, PBLK Masking Shown in Table 11)  
Register  
Length (Bits)  
Range  
Description  
SEQ  
MULT_SWEEP  
5
2
0 to 31 V-sequence number Selected V-sequence for each region in the field.  
0 to 3  
Enable multiplier mode and/or sweep mode for each region.  
0 = multiplier off, sweep off.  
1 = multiplier off, sweep on.  
2 = multiplier on, sweep off.  
3 = multiplier on, sweep on.  
SCP  
VDLEN  
HDLASTLEN  
VSGPATSEL  
13  
13  
13  
24  
0 to 8191 line number  
0 to 8191 lines  
0 to 8191 pixels  
High/low  
Sequence change position for each region.  
Total number of lines in each field.  
Length in pixels of the last HD line in each field.  
VSGPATSEL selects which two V-pattern toggle positions are used by each  
V-output. Each bit represents one V-output: Bit 0 = XV1 output, Bit 23 =  
XV24 output.  
0 = use TOG1 and TOG2.  
1 = use TOG3 and TOG4.  
SGMASK  
24  
High/low, each VSG  
Set high to mask each individual VSG output.  
Bit 0: XV1 mask.  
Bit 23: XV24 mask.  
SGACTLINE1  
SGACTLINE2  
13  
13  
0 to 8191 line number  
0 to 8191 line number  
Selects the line in the field where the VSG signals are active.  
Selects a second line in the field to repeat the VSG signals. If this register is  
not used, set it equal to SGACTLINE1 or to the maximum value.  
Rev. B | Page 45 of 112  
 
AD9920A  
SCP0  
SCP1  
SCP2  
SCP3  
SCP4  
SCP5  
SCP8  
VD  
REGION 0  
REGION 1  
REGION 2  
REGION 3  
REGION 4  
REGION 8  
HD  
XV1 TO XVx  
SEQ0  
SEQ1  
SEQ8  
SEQ2  
SEQ3  
SEQ4  
SGACTLINE1  
VSG  
FIELD SETTINGS:  
1. SEQUENCE CHANGE POSITIONS (SCP0 TO SCP8) DEFINE EACH OF THE NINE AVAILABLE REGIONS IN THE FIELD.  
2. SEQ0 TO SEQ8 SELECT THE DESIRED V-SEQUENCE FOR EACH REGION.  
3. SGACTLINE1 REGISTER SELECTS WHICH HD LINE IN THE FIELD CONTAINS THE SENSOR GATE PULSE(S).  
Figure 57. Complete Field Divided into Regions  
VD  
HD  
SCP1  
SCP2  
LINE 0  
LINE 1  
LINE  
2
LINE 24  
LINE 25  
XV1 TO XVx  
REGION 0  
REGION 1: SWEEP REGION  
REGION 2  
Figure 58. Example of Sweep Region for High Speed Vertical Shift  
Figure 58 shows an example of the sweep mode operation. The  
number of vertical pulses needed depends on the vertical reso-  
lution of the CCD. The toggle positions for the XV1 to XV24  
signals are generated using the V-pattern registers (see Table 14).  
A single pulse is created using the polarity and toggle position  
registers. The number of repetitions is then programmed to match  
the number of vertical shifts required by the CCD. Repetitions  
are programmed into the V-sequence registers using the VREP  
registers (see Table 15). This produces a pulse train of the appro-  
priate length. Normally, the pulse train is truncated at the end  
of the HD line length, but when sweep mode is enabled for this  
region, the HD boundaries are ignored.  
Sweep Mode Operation  
The AD9920A contains an additional mode of vertical timing  
operation called sweep mode. This mode is used to generate a  
large number of repetitive pulses that span across multiple HD  
lines. An example of where this mode is needed is at the start of  
the CCD readout operation. At the end of the image exposure  
before the image is transferred by the sensor gate pulses, the  
vertical interline CCD registers should be free of all charge. This  
can be accomplished by quickly shifting out any charge using a  
long series of pulses from the vertical outputs. Depending on  
the vertical resolution of the CCD, up to 3000 clock cycles  
might be needed to shift the charge out of each vertical CCD  
line. This operation spans across multiple HD line lengths.  
Normally, the AD9920A vertical timing must be contained  
within one HD line length, but when sweep mode is enabled,  
the HD boundaries are ignored until the region is finished. To  
enable sweep mode within any region, program the appropriate  
SWEEP register to high.  
In Figure 58, the sweep region occupies 23 HD lines. After the  
sweep mode region is complete, normal sequence operation  
resumes in the next region. When using sweep mode, be sure to  
set the region boundaries (using the sequence change positions)  
to the appropriate lines to prevent the sweep operation from  
overlapping with the next V-sequence.  
Rev. B | Page 46 of 112  
 
 
AD9920A  
Multiplier Mode  
To calculate the exact toggle position, which is counted in pixels  
after the start position, use the following equation:  
To generate very wide vertical timing pulses, a vertical region  
can be configured into a multiplier region. This mode uses the  
V-pattern registers in a slightly different manner. Multiplier  
mode can be used to support unusual CCD timing requirements,  
such as vertical pulses that are wider than the 13-bit V-pattern  
toggle position counter. In general, the 13-bit toggle position  
counter can be used with the sweep mode feature to support  
very wide pulses; however, multiplier mode can be used to  
generate even wider pulses.  
Multiplier Mode Toggle Position = VTOG × VLEN  
Because the VTOG register is multiplied by VLEN, the resolu-  
tion of the toggle position placement is reduced. If VLEN = 4,  
the toggle position precision is reduced to four-pixel increments  
instead of to single-pixel increments. Table 20 summarizes how  
the V-pattern group registers are used in multiplier mode opera-  
tion. In multiplier mode, the VREP registers must always be  
programmed to the same value as the highest toggle position.  
The start polarity and toggle positions are still used in the same  
manner as in the standard V-pattern group programming, but  
VLEN is used differently. Instead of using the pixel counter  
(HD counter) to specify the toggle position locations (VTOG1,  
VTOG2, VTOG3, and VTOG4) of the V-pattern group, the  
VLEN is multiplied by the VTOG position to allow very long  
pulses to be generated.  
Figure 59 illustrates this operation. The first toggle position is 2,  
and the second toggle position is 9. In nonmultiplier mode, this  
causes the V-sequence to toggle at Pixel 2 and then at Pixel 9  
within a single HD line. However, in multiplier mode, toggle  
positions are multiplied by the value of VLEN (in this case, 4);  
therefore, the first toggle occurs at Pixel 8, and the second toggle  
occurs at Pixel 36. Sweep mode is also enabled to allow the  
toggle positions to cross the HD line boundaries.  
Table 20. Multiplier Mode Register Parameters  
Register  
MULT_SWEEPx  
VPOL  
Length (Bits) Range  
Description  
1
High/low  
High enables multiplier mode.  
Starting polarity of XV1 to XV24 signals in each V-pattern group.  
Toggle positions for XV1 to XV24 signals in each V-pattern group.  
1
High/low  
VTOG  
13  
0 to 8191 pixel  
location  
VLEN  
VREP  
13  
13  
0 to 8191 pixels Used as multiplier factor for toggle position counter.  
0 to 8191 pixel  
location  
With VREP_MODE = 0, VREP_EVEN must be set to the same value as the highest VTOG  
value. VREP_ODD and VREPA can be set to 0.  
START POSITION OF VPAT GROUP IS STILL PROGRAMMED IN THE V-SEQUENCE REGISTERS  
HD  
5
5
3
VLEN  
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
1
9
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
PIXEL  
NUMBER  
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40  
4
4
XV1 TO XV24  
1
2
2
MULTIPLIER MODE V-PATTERN GROUP PROPERTIES:  
1
START POLARITY (STARTPOL = 0).  
2
FIRST, SECOND, AND THIRD TOGGLE POSITIONS (VTOG1 = 2, VTOG2 = 9).  
3
LENGTH OF VPAT COUNTER (VLEN = 4); THIS IS THE MINIMUM RESOLUTION FOR TOGGLE POSITION CHANGES.  
4
TOGGLE POSITIONS OCCUR AT LOCATION EQUAL TO (VTOG × VLEN).  
5
IF SWEEP REGION IS ENABLED, THE V-PULSES MAY ALSO CROSS THE HD BOUNDARIES, AS SHOWN ABOVE.  
Figure 59. Example of Multiplier Region for Wide Vertical Pulse Timing  
Rev. B | Page 47 of 112  
 
 
AD9920A  
Note that only two of the four V-pattern toggle positions are  
available when a vertical signal is selected to be a VSG pulse.  
Vertical Sensor Gate (Shift Gate) Patterns  
In an interline CCD, the vertical sensor gate (VSG) pulses are  
used to transfer the pixel charges from the light-sensitive image  
area into light-shielded vertical registers. From the light-shielded  
vertical registers, the image is clocked out line-by-line using the  
vertical transfer pulses (XV signals) in conjunction with the high  
speed horizontal clocks. The AD9920A has 24 vertical signals,  
and each signal can be assigned as a VSG pulse instead of as an  
XV pulse.  
The SGACTLINE1 and SGACTLINE2 registers are used to  
select which line in the field is the VSG line. The VSG active  
line location is used to reference when the substrate clocking  
(SUBCK) signal begins to operate in each field. For more infor-  
mation, see the Substrate Clock Operation (SUBCK) section.  
Also located in the field registers, the SGMASK register selects  
which individual VSG pulses are active in a given field. Therefore,  
all SG patterns to be preprogrammed into the V-pattern registers  
and the appropriate pulses for the different fields can be enabled  
separately.  
Table 21 summarizes the VSG control registers, which are  
mainly located in the field register space (see Table 19). The  
VSGSELECT register (Address 0x1C in the fixed address space)  
determines which vertical outputs are assigned as VSG pulses.  
When a signal is selected to be a VSG pulse, only the starting  
polarity and two of the V-pattern toggle positions are used. The  
VSGPATSEL register in the V-sequence registers is used to assign  
either TOG1 and TOG2 or TOG3 and TOG4 to the VSG signal.  
The AD9920A is an integrated AFETG and V-driver, so the  
connections between the AFETG and V-driver are fixed, as  
shown in Figure 65 and Figure 66. The VSGSELECT register  
must be programmed to 0xFF8000.  
Table 21. VSG Control Registers (also see Field Registers in Table 19)  
Register  
Length (Bits) Range  
Description  
VSGSELECT  
(Located in Fixed  
Address Space, 0x1C)  
24  
High/low  
Selection of VSG signals from XV signals. Set to 1 to make signal a VSG.  
The recommended setting for this register is 0xFF8000.  
Bit 0: XV1 selection (0 = XV pulse; 1 = VSG pulse).  
Bit 1: XV2 selection.  
Bit 23: XV24 selection.  
VSGPATSEL  
24  
High/low  
When VSG signal is selected using the VSGSELECT register, VSGPATSEL  
selects which V-pattern toggle positions are used. When this register is  
set to 0, Toggle 1 and Toggle 2 are used. When this register is set to 1,  
Toggle 3 and Toggle 4 are used.  
Bit 0: XV1 selection (0 = use TOG1, TOG2; 1 = use TOG3, TOG4).  
Bit 1: XV2 selection.  
Bit 23: XV24 selection.  
SGMASK  
24  
High/low, each VSG  
Set high to mask each individual VSG output.  
Bit 0: XV1 mask.  
Bit 23: XV24 mask.  
SGACTLINE1  
SGACTLINE2  
13  
13  
0 to 8191 line number  
0 to 8191 line number  
Selects the line in the field where the VSG signals are active.  
Selects a second line in the field to repeat the VSG signals. If this register  
is not used, set it equal in value to SGACTLINE1 or to the maximum value.  
VD  
4
HD  
1
2
VSG PATTERN  
3
PROGRAMMABLE SETTINGS FOR EACH PATTERN:  
1
START POLARITY OF PULSE (FROM VPOL IN SEQUENCE REGISTERS).  
FIRST TOGGLE POSITION (FROM V-PATTERN REGISTERS).  
SECOND TOGGLE POSITION (FROM V-PATTERN REGISTERS).  
2
3
4
ACTIVE LINE FOR VSG PULSES WITHIN THE FIELD (FROM FIELD REGISTERS).  
Figure 60. Vertical Sensor Gate Pulse Placement  
Rev. B | Page 48 of 112  
 
AD9920A  
The other two registers (Address 0x2B and Address 0x2C) are  
used to select which of the programmed fields are used and in  
which order. Up to seven fields can be used in a single write to  
the mode register. The AD9920A starts with the field timing  
specified by FIELD1, and on the next VD switches to the timing  
specified by FIELD2, and so on. After completing the total  
number of fields specified by the mode register, the AD9920A  
repeats by starting at the first field. This continues until a new  
write to the mode register occurs. Figure 61 shows example  
mode register settings for different field configurations.  
Mode Registers  
The mode registers are used to select the field timing of the  
AD9920A. Typically, all of the field, V-sequence, and V-pattern  
information is programmed into the AD9920A at startup. During  
operation, the mode registers allow the user to select any combi-  
nation of field timing to meet the requirements of the system.  
The advantage of using the mode registers in conjunction with  
preprogrammed timing is that it greatly reduces the system pro-  
gramming requirements during camera operation. Only a few  
register writes are required when the camera operating mode is  
changed; the vertical timing information does not need to be  
changed with each camera mode change.  
Note that only a write to Address 0x2C properly resets the field  
counter. Therefore, when changing the values in any of the mode  
registers, it is recommended that all three registers be updated  
together in the same field (VD period).  
A basic still camera application can require six fields of vertical  
timing—one for draft mode operation, one for autofocusing,  
and four for still image readout. All of the register timing informa-  
tion for the six fields is loaded at startup. Then, during camera  
operation, the mode registers select which field timing is active,  
depending on how the camera is being used.  
Caution  
The mode registers are SCK updated by default. If they are  
configured as VD-updated registers by writing Address 0xB4 =  
0x03FF and Address 0xB5 = 0xFC00, the new mode informa-  
tion is updated on the second VD falling edge after the write  
occurs, rather than on the first VD falling edge. See Figure 63  
for an example.  
Table 22 shows how the mode registers are used. The mode  
register (Address 0x2A) specifies how many total fields are used.  
Any value from 1 to 7 can be selected using these three bits.  
Table 22. Mode Registers  
Address Name  
Length (Bits) Description  
0x2A  
0x2B  
MODE  
FIELD1  
FIELD2  
FIELD3  
FIELD4  
FIELD5  
FIELD6  
FIELD7  
3
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Total number of fields to cycle through. Set from 1 to 7.  
Selected field (from FIELD registers in configurable memory) for the first field to cycle through.  
Selected field (from FIELD registers in configurable memory) for the second field to cycle through.  
Selected field (from FIELD registers in configurable memory) for the third field to cycle through.  
Selected field (from FIELD registers in configurable memory) for the fourth field to cycle through.  
Selected field (from FIELD registers in configurable memory) for the fifth field to cycle through.  
Selected field (from FIELD registers in configurable memory) for the sixth field to cycle through.  
Selected field (from FIELD registers in configurable memory) for the seventh field to cycle through.  
0x2C  
Rev. B | Page 49 of 112  
 
 
AD9920A  
EXAMPLE 1:  
TOTAL FIELDS = 3, FIRST FIELD = FIELD1, SECOND FIELD = FIELD2, THIRD FIELD = FIELD3  
MODE SETTINGS:  
0x2A = 0x03  
0x2B = 0x820  
0x2C = 0x00  
FIELD2  
FIELD3  
FIELD1  
EXAMPLE 2:  
TOTAL FIELDS = 1, FIRST FIELD = FIELD3  
MODE SETTINGS:  
0x2A = 0x01  
0x2B = 0x03  
0x2C = 0x00  
FIELD3  
EXAMPLE 3:  
TOTAL FIELDS = 4, FIRST FIELD = FIELD5, SECOND FIELD = FIELD1, THIRD FIELD = FIELD4, FOURTH FIELD = FIELD2  
MODE SETTINGS:  
0x2A = 0x04  
0x2B = 0x11025  
0x2C = 0x00  
FIELD2  
FIELD1  
FIELD4  
FIELD5  
Figure 61. Using the Mode Registers to Select Field Timing  
VD  
MODE WRITE MODE UPDATE  
A
REGISTER WRITE  
2
MODE FIELD NUMBER  
4 (DRAFT)  
4 (DRAFT)  
0
(STILL FIRST FIELD)  
1 (STILL SECOND FIELD)  
EXAMPLE MODE REGISTER CHANGE:  
REGISTER WRITE A––WRITE TO MODE REGISTERS 0x2A, 0x2B, 0x2C TO SPECIFY  
CHANGE FROM DRAFT MODE (FIELD4) TO STILL MODE (FIELD1/2/3).  
ALSO WRITE TO VGA GAIN OR ANY NEW REGISTER VALUES NEEDED  
FOR STILL FRAME OPERATION, SUCH AS NEW FIELD INFORMATION.  
Figure 62. Update of Mode Register, SCK Updated (Default Setting)  
VD  
MODE WRITE  
A
MODE UPDATE  
B
REGISTER WRITE  
2
MODE FIELD NUMBER  
4 (DRAFT)  
4 (DRAFT)  
0
(STILL FIRST FIELD)  
1 (STILL SECOND FIELD)  
EXAMPLE MODE REGISTER CHANGE:  
REGISTER WRITE A––WRITE TO MODE REGISTERS 0x2A, 0x2B, 0x2C TO SPECIFY  
CHANGE FROM DRAFT MODE (FIELD4) TO STILL MODE (FIELD1/2/3).  
REGISTER WRITE B––WRITE TO VGA GAIN OR ANY NEW REGISTER VALUES NEEDED  
FOR STILL FRAME OPERATION, SUCH AS NEW FIELD INFORMATION.  
NOTES  
1. NEW MODE INFORMATION IS UPDATED AT SECOND VD FALLING EDGE AFTER  
SERIAL WRITE A.  
Figure 63. Update of Mode Register, VD Updated  
Rev. B | Page 50 of 112  
 
 
AD9920A  
Region 1 consists of only two lines and uses standard single-line  
vertical shift timing. The timing of this region area is the same  
as the timing in Region 3.  
VERTICAL TIMING EXAMPLE  
To better understand how the AD9920A vertical timing genera-  
tion is used, consider the example CCD timing chart in Figure 64.  
This example illustrates a CCD using a general three-field read-  
out technique. As shown in Figure 64, each readout field must be  
divided into separate regions to perform each step of the readout.  
The sequence change positions (SCPs) determine the line bound-  
aries for each region, and the SEQ registers assign a particular  
V-sequence to each region. The V-sequences contain the specific  
timing information required in each region: V1 to V6 pulses  
(using V-pattern groups), HBLK/CLPOB timing, and VSG  
patterns for the SG active lines.  
Region 2 is the sensor gate line in which the VSG pulses transfer  
the image into the vertical CCD registers. This region may require  
the use of the second V-pattern group for the SG active line.  
Region 3 also uses the standard single-line vertical shift timing,  
the same timing as Region 1. Four regions are required in each  
of the three fields.  
The timing for Region 1 and Region 3 is essentially the same,  
reducing the complexity of the register programming. Other  
registers must be used during the actual readout operation.  
These include the mode registers, shutter control registers  
(PRIMARY_ACTION, SUBCK, and GPO for MSHUT and  
VSUB control), and AFE gain registers.  
This timing example requires four regions for each of the three  
fields, labeled Region 0, Region 1, Region 2, and Region 3. Because  
the AD9920A allows many individual fields to be programmed,  
FIELD1, FIELD2, and FIELD3 can be used to meet the require-  
ments of this timing example. The four regions for each field are  
very similar in this example, but the individual registers for each  
field allow flexibility to accommodate other timing charts.  
Important Note Regarding Signal Polarities  
When programming the AD9920A to generate the V1 to V24  
and SUBCK signals, the external V-driver circuit usually inverts  
these signals. Carefully check the timing signals that are required  
at the input and output of the V-driver circuit being used, and  
adjust the polarities of the AD9920A outputs accordingly.  
Region 0 is a high speed, vertical shift region. Sweep mode can be  
used to generate this timing operation with the desired number  
of high speed vertical pulses needed to clear any charge from  
the CCD vertical registers.  
Rev. B | Page 51 of 112  
 
AD9920A  
N
3
N –  
2 1  
1 8  
1 5  
1 2  
9
6
3
1
4
N –  
N –  
2 0  
1 7  
1 4  
1 1  
8
5
2
2
5
N –  
N –  
1 6  
1 3  
1 0  
7
4
1
Figure 64. CCD Timing Example—Dividing Each Field into Regions  
Rev. B | Page 52 of 112  
 
AD9920A  
INTERNAL VERTICAL DRIVER CONNECTIONS (18-CHANNEL MODE)  
AD9920A  
V-DRIVER  
+3V  
VH,VL  
XV16 (XSG1)  
XV1  
G9  
G6  
G5  
V1A  
V1B  
XV17 (XSG2)  
XV18 (XSG3)  
V2A  
V2B  
XV2  
E9  
J9  
XV19 (XSG4)  
XV20 (XSG5)  
XV3  
V3A  
V3B  
V4  
3-LEVEL OUTPUTS  
F6  
F5  
XV21 (XSG6)  
XV4  
XV22 (XSG7)  
XV5  
E5  
V5  
V6  
XV23 (XSG8)  
XV6  
D10  
INTERNAL  
TIMING  
GENERATOR  
XV24 (XSG9)  
F9  
F7  
XV7  
XV8  
XV9  
V7  
V8  
D9  
V9  
C4  
C5  
B5  
XV10  
XV11  
V10  
V11  
V12  
2-LEVEL OUTPUTS  
XV12  
XV13  
E6  
E7  
V13  
V14  
XV14  
XV15  
C8  
J8  
2-LEVEL OUTPUT,  
REDUCED DRIVE  
V15  
V16  
XSUBCK  
G7  
SUBCK  
K11  
XSUBCNT (LOGIC INPUT)  
J6  
LEGEN  
Figure 65. Internal AFETG to V-Driver Connections, Legacy Mode (18-Channel Mode)  
Rev. B | Page 53 of 112  
 
 
AD9920A  
INTERNAL VERTICAL DRIVER CONNECTIONS (19-CHANNEL MODE)  
AD9920A  
V-DRIVER  
+3V  
VH,VL  
XV16 (XSG1)  
G9  
G6  
G5  
V1A  
V1B  
V2A  
V2B  
V3A  
XV1  
XV17 (XSG2)  
XV18 (XSG3)  
XV2  
XV19 (XSG4)  
XV3  
E9  
J9  
XV20 (XSG5)  
3-LEVEL OUTPUTS  
XV23  
F6  
F5  
XV21 (XSG6)  
V3B  
V4  
XV4  
XV22 (XSG7)  
XV5  
E5  
V5  
V6  
GPO5 (XSG8)  
XV6  
D10  
INTERNAL  
TIMING  
GENERATOR  
GPO6 (XSG9)  
F9  
F7  
XV7  
XV8  
XV9  
V7  
V8  
D9  
V9  
2-LEVEL OUTPUTS  
C4  
C5  
B5  
XV10  
XV11  
V10  
V11  
V12  
XV12  
XV13  
E6  
E7  
V13  
V14  
XV14  
2-LEVEL OUTPUT,  
REDUCED DRIVE  
C8  
J8  
XV15  
XV24  
V15  
V16  
XSUBCK  
G7  
SUBCK  
K11  
XSUBCNT (LOGIC INPUT)  
J6  
LEGEN  
+3V  
Figure 66. Internal AFETG to V-Driver Connections (19-Channel Mode)  
Rev. B | Page 54 of 112  
 
 
AD9920A  
OUTPUT POLARITY OF VERTICAL TRANSFER CLOCKS AND SUBSTRATE CLOCK  
Table 23. V1A Output Polarity  
Vertical Driver Input  
Table 29. V4 Output Polarity  
Vertical Driver Input  
LEGEN  
LEGEN  
XV1  
L
L
H
H
XV16 (XSG1)  
V1A Output  
XV4  
L
L
H
H
XV22 (XSG7)  
V4 Output  
X
X
X
X
L
H
L
VH  
VM  
VL  
X
X
X
X
L
H
L
VH  
VM  
VL  
H
VL  
H
VL  
Table 24. V1B Output Polarity  
Vertical Driver Input  
Table 30. V5 Output Polarity  
Vertical Driver Input  
LEGEN  
XV23  
(XSG8)  
GPO5  
(XSG8)  
XV1  
L
L
H
H
XV17 (XSG2)  
V1B Output  
LEGEN  
XV5  
L
L
H
H
L
L
H
H
V5 Output  
X
X
X
X
L
H
L
VH  
VM  
VL  
L
L
L
L
H
H
H
H
L
H
L
H
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
L
H
L
H
VH  
VM  
VL  
H
VL  
VL  
Table 25. V2A Output Polarity  
Vertical Driver Input  
VH  
VM  
VL  
LEGEN  
XV2  
L
L
H
H
XV18 (XSG3)  
V2A Output  
VL  
X
X
X
X
L
H
L
VH  
VM  
VL  
Table 31. V6 Output Polarity  
Vertical Driver Input  
H
VL  
XV24  
(XSG9)  
GPO6  
(XSG9)  
LEGEN  
XV6  
L
L
H
H
L
L
H
H
V6 Output  
Table 26. V2B Output Polarity  
Vertical Driver Input  
L
L
L
L
H
H
H
H
L
H
L
H
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
L
H
L
H
VH  
VM  
VL  
LEGEN  
XV2  
L
L
H
H
XV19 (XSG4)  
V2B Output  
X
X
X
X
L
H
L
VH  
VM  
VL  
VL  
VH  
VM  
VL  
H
VL  
VL  
Table 27. V3A Output Polarity  
Vertical Driver Input  
Table 32. V7 Output Polarity  
Vertical Driver Input  
LEGEN  
XV3  
L
L
H
H
XV20 (XSG5)  
V3A Output  
X
X
X
X
L
H
L
VH  
VM  
VL  
LEGEN  
XV7  
L
H
V7 Output  
X
X
VM  
VL  
H
VL  
Table 33. V8 Output Polarity  
Vertical Driver Input  
Table 28. V3B Output Polarity  
Vertical Driver Input  
LEGEN  
XV8  
L
H
V8 Output  
XV21  
(XSG6)  
X
X
VM  
VL  
LEGEN  
XV3  
L
L
H
H
X
XV23  
V3B Output  
L
L
L
L
H
H
H
H
X
X
X
X
L
L
H
L
H
L
VH  
VM  
VL  
Table 34. V9 Output Polarity  
Vertical Driver Input  
VL  
LEGEN  
XV9  
L
H
V9 Output  
VH  
VM  
VL  
X
X
VM  
VL  
X
X
X
L
H
H
H
L
H
VL  
Rev. B | Page 55 of 112  
 
AD9920A  
Table 35. V10 Output Polarity  
Table 40. V15 Output Polarity  
Vertical Driver Input  
Vertical Driver Input  
LEGEN  
LEGEN  
XV10  
V10 Output  
XV15  
V15 Output  
X
X
L
H
VM  
VL  
X
X
L
H
VM  
VL  
Table 36. V11 Output Polarity  
Vertical Driver Input  
Table 41. V16 Output Polarity  
Vertical Driver Input  
LEGEN  
LEGEN  
XV11  
V11 Output  
XV24  
V16 Output  
X
X
L
H
VM  
VL  
L
H
H
X
L
H
VL  
VM  
VL  
Table 37. V12 Output Polarity  
Vertical Driver Input  
Table 42. SUBCK Output Polarity  
Vertical Driver Input  
LEGEN  
XV12  
V12 Output  
LEGEN  
XSUBCK  
XSUBCNT  
SUBCK Output  
X
X
L
H
VM  
VL  
X
X
X
X
L
L
H
H
L
H
L
VH  
VH  
VMM  
VLL  
Table 38. V13 Output Polarity  
Vertical Driver Input  
H
LEGEN  
XV13  
V13 Output  
X
X
L
H
VM  
VL  
Table 39. V14 Output Polarity  
Vertical Driver Input  
LEGEN  
XV14  
V14 Output  
X
X
L
H
VM  
VL  
Rev. B | Page 56 of 112  
AD9920A  
XV1  
XV16 (XSG1)  
VH  
V1A  
VM  
VL  
Figure 67. XV1, XV16, and V1A Output Polarities  
Figure 68. XV1, XV17, and V1B Output Polarities  
Figure 69. XV2, XV18, and V2A Output Polarities  
XV1  
XV17 (XSG2)  
VH  
V1B  
VM  
VL  
XV2  
XV18 (XSG3)  
VH  
V2A  
VM  
VL  
XV2  
XV19 (XSG4)  
VH  
V2B  
VM  
VL  
Figure 70. XV2, XV19, and V2B Output Polarities  
Rev. B | Page 57 of 112  
AD9920A  
XV3  
XV20 (XSG5)  
VH  
V3A  
VM  
VL  
Figure 71. XV3, XV20, and V3A Output Polarities  
XV3  
XV21 (XSG6)  
VH  
V3B  
VM  
VL  
LEGEN  
Figure 72. XV3, XV21, and V3B Output Polarities (  
= Low)  
XV23  
XV21 (XSG6)  
VH  
V3B  
VM  
VL  
LEGEN  
Figure 73. XV23, XV21, and V3B Output Polarities (  
= High)  
XV4  
XV22 (XSG7)  
VH  
V4  
VM  
VL  
Figure 74. XV4, XV22, and V4 Output Polarities  
Rev. B | Page 58 of 112  
AD9920A  
XV5  
XV23 (XSG8)  
VH  
V5  
VM  
VL  
LEGEN  
LEGEN  
LEGEN  
Figure 75. XV5, XV23, and V5 Output Polarities (  
Figure 76. XV5, GPO5, and V5 Output Polarities (  
Figure 77. XV6, GPO6, and V6 Output Polarities (  
= Low)  
= High)  
= High)  
XV5  
GPO5 (XSG8)  
VH  
V5  
VM  
VL  
XV6  
GPO6 (XSG9)  
VH  
V6  
VM  
VL  
XV7, XV8, XV9, XV10,  
XV11, XV12, XV13,  
XV14, XV15  
VM  
V7, V8, V9, V10, V11,  
V12, V13, V14, V15  
VL  
Figure 78. Two-Level V-Driver Output Polarities  
LEGEN  
XV24  
VM  
V16  
VL  
Figure 79. XV24 and V16 Output Polarities  
Rev. B | Page 59 of 112  
AD9920A  
XSUBCNT  
XSUBCK  
VH  
SUBCK  
VMM  
VLL  
Figure 80. XSUBCNT, XSUBCK, and SUBCK Output Polarities  
V-DRIVER SLEW RATE CONTROL  
SUBSTRATE CLOCK OPERATION (SUBCK)  
The AD9920A allows the user to moderate the slew rates of the  
V-driver outputs when transitioning to VM and VL (this feature  
does not affect transitions to VH). This feature minimizes cou-  
pling from V-driver activity that occurs while the AD9920A is  
clocking valid image pixel data out of the CCD.  
The CCD image exposure time is controlled by the substrate  
clock signal (SUBCK), which pulses the CCD substrate to clear  
out accumulated charge. The AD9920A supports three types of  
electronic shuttering: normal, high precision, and low speed.  
Along with the SUBCK pulse placement, the AD9920A can  
accommodate different readout configurations to further  
suppress the SUBCK pulses during multiple field readouts.  
There are both coarse and fine mechanisms for controlling the  
slew rate of the V1A to V13 outputs. If SRSW = VDD and  
SRCTL = VDD, the V1A to V13 switches have roughly 10%  
of their normal drive strength (that is, when SRSW = VSS).  
If SRSW = VDD and SRCTL < VDD, the voltage applied to  
SRCTL controls the slew rate for V1A to V13 transitions from  
VM to VL and from VL to VM. For values from 800 mV to  
VDD, V1A to V13 transition at a fraction of their maximum  
slew rate that is roughly proportional to the voltage applied to  
SRCTL. (It is not recommended that voltages less than 800 mV  
be applied to SRCTL.)  
The SUBCK signal is a programmable string of pulses, each  
occupying a line following the primary sense gate active line,  
SGACTLINE1 (see Table 43). The SUBCK signal has program-  
mable pulse width, line placement, and number of pulses to  
accurately control the exposure time.  
SUBCK Normal Operation  
By default, the AD9920A operates in the normal SUBCK  
configuration, in which the SUBCK signal is pulsing in every  
VD field (see Figure 81). The SUBCK pulse occurs once per  
line, and the total number of repetitions within the field  
determines the length of the exposure time. The SUBCK  
pulse polarity and toggle positions within a line are program-  
mable using the SUBCK_POL and SUBCK_TOG1 registers  
(see Table 43). The number of SUBCK pulses per field is  
programmed in the SUBCKNUM register (Address 0x75).  
The user must tune this voltage for the specific system to  
determine the optimal setting that ensures maximum charge  
transfer efficiency and minimizes any coupling from V-driver  
activity into the image. V14, V15, and V16 are permanently  
weak compared with V1A to V13 and are not affected by the  
slew rate control function. Note that the slew rate control  
feature is intended only for use with CCDs that require V-driver  
activity outside the normal horizontal clock blanking region.  
As shown in Figure 81, the SUBCK pulses always begin in the line  
following the SG active line, which is specified in the SGACTLINE  
registers for each field. The SUBCK_POL, SUBCK_TOG1,  
SUBCK_TOG2, SUBCKNUM, and SUBCKSUPPRESS registers  
are updated at the start of the line after the sensor gate line, as  
described in the Updating New Register Values section.  
SHUTTER TIMING CONTROL  
The AD9920A supports the generation of electronic shuttering  
(SUBCK) and also features flexible general-purpose outputs  
(GPOs) to control mechanical shuttering, CCD substrate bias  
switching, and strobe circuitry. In the following sections, the  
terms sense gate (SG) and vertical sense gate (VSG) are used  
interchangeably.  
Rev. B | Page 60 of 112  
 
 
AD9920A  
If the PRIMARY_ACTION register is used while the  
SUBCK High Precision Operation  
SUBCKMASK_NUM and SGMASK_NUM registers are set to  
0, the behavior of the SUBCK and VSG signals is not different  
from the normal shutter or high precision shutter operations.  
Therefore, the primary field counter can be used for other tasks  
(described in the General-Purpose Outputs (GPOs) section)  
without disrupting normal activity. In addition, a secondary  
field counter is available that has no effect on the SUBCK and  
VSG signals. These counters are described in detail in the Field  
Counters section.  
High precision shuttering is used in the same manner as normal  
shuttering, but it uses an additional register to control the last  
SUBCK pulse. In this mode, the SUBCK still pulses once per line,  
but the last SUBCK in the field has an additional SUBCK pulse,  
whose location is determined by the SUBCKHP_TOG registers,  
as shown in Figure 82. Finer resolution of the exposure time is  
possible using this mode. Leaving the SUBCKHP_TOG registers  
set to their maximum value (0xFFFFFF) disables the last SUBCK  
pulse (default setting).  
SUBCKSUPPRESS Register  
SUBCK Low Speed Operation  
By default, the SUBCK pulses begin in the line following  
SGACTLINE1. For applications where the SUBCK pulse should  
be suppressed for one or more lines following the VSG line, the  
SUBCKSUPPRESS register can be programmed. This register  
setting delays the start of the SUBCK pulses until the specified  
number of lines following SGACTLINE1.  
Normal and high precision shutter operations are used when  
the exposure time is less than one field. For exposure times greater  
than one field, the low speed (LS) shutter features can be used.  
The AD9920A includes a field counter (primary field counter)  
to regulate long exposure times. The primary field counter  
(Address 0x70) must be activated to serve as the trigger for the  
LS operation. The durations of the LS exposure and read are  
specified by the SGMASK_NUM and SUBCKMASK_NUM  
registers (Address 0x74), respectively. As shown in Figure 83,  
this mode suppresses the SUBCK and VSG outputs for up to  
8192 fields (VD periods).  
Read After Exposure  
To read the CCD data after exposure, the SG should resume  
normal activity while the SUBCK remains null. By default, the  
AD9920A generates the VSG pulses in every field. When only  
a single exposure and a single frame read are desired, as in the  
case of preview mode, the VSG and SUBCK pulses can operate  
in every field.  
To activate an LS shutter operation, trigger the start of the  
exposure by writing to the PRIMARY_ACTION register bits  
according to the desired effect (see Table 59). When the primary  
counter is activated, the next VD period becomes the first active  
period of the exposure for which the VSG and SUBCK masks  
are applied.  
Other applications require that a greater number of frames be  
read, in which case SUBCK must be masked until the readout is  
finished. The SUBCKMASK_NUM register specifies the total  
number of fields (exposure and read) to mask SUBCK. A two-field  
CCD frame read mode typically requires two additional fields of  
SUBCK masking (SUBCKMASK_NUM = 2). A three-field,  
6-phase CCD requires three additional fields of SUBCK mask-  
ing after the read begins (SUBCKMASK_NUM = 3).  
Optionally, if the SUBCKMASK_SKIP1 register is enabled,  
the AD9920A ignores the first VSG and SUBCK masks in the  
subsequent fields. This is generally desired so that the exposure  
time begins in the field after the exposure operation is initiated.  
Figure 83 shows operation with SUBCKMASK_SKIP1 = 1. The  
same functionality can also be achieved using the PRIMARY_  
DELAY register along with the PRIMARY_ACTION register.  
Note that the SUBCKMASK_SKIP1 register setting allows  
SUBCK pulses at the beginning of the field of exposure.  
Table 43. SUBCK and Exposure/Read Register Parameters  
Register  
Length (Bits) Range  
Description  
SGMASK_NUM  
SUBCKMASK_NUM 13  
13  
0 to 8191 number of fields Exposure duration (number of fields to suppress VSG) for LS operation.  
0 to 8191 number of fields Exposure plus readout duration (number of fields to suppress SUBCK) for LS.  
SUBCKMASK_SKIP1  
SUBCKSUPPRESS  
SUBCKNUM  
SG_SUPPRESS  
SUBCK_TOG1  
1
On/off  
0 to 8191 lines  
Suppress SG/SUBCK masks for one field (default = 0). Typically set to 1.  
Number of lines to suppress the start of SUBCK pulses after SGACTLINE1.  
13  
13  
1
14  
14  
1
1 to 8191 number of pulses Total number of SUBCK pulses per field, at one pulse per line.  
On/off  
0 to 16383 pixel locations  
0 to 16383 pixel locations  
Low/high  
Suppress the SG and allow SUBCK to finish at SUBCKNUM.  
SUBCK Toggle Position 1.  
SUBCK Toggle Position 2.  
SUBCK_TOG2  
SUBCK_POL  
SUBCK start polarity.  
SUBCKHP_TOG1  
SUBCKHP_TOG2  
14  
14  
0 to 16383 pixel locations  
0 to 16383 pixel locations  
High precision SUBCK Toggle Position 1. Selectable as SG or VD updated.  
High precision SUBCK Toggle Position 2. Selectable as SG or VD updated.  
Rev. B | Page 61 of 112  
 
AD9920A  
VD  
HD  
VSG  
tEXP  
tEXP  
SUBCK  
SUBCK PROGRAMMABLE SETTINGS:  
1. PULSE POLARITY USING THE SUBCK_POL REGISTER.  
2. NUMBER OF PULSES WITHIN THE FIELD USING THE SUBCKNUM REGISTER (SUBCKNUM = 3 IN THIS EXAMPLE).  
3. PIXEL LOCATION OF PULSE WITHIN THE LINE AND PULSE WIDTH PROGRAMMED USING THE SUBCK_TOG1 TOGGLE POSITION REGISTER.  
Figure 81. Normal SUBCK Operation  
VD  
HD  
VSG  
tEXP  
tEXP  
SUBCK  
NOTES  
1. SECOND SUBCK PULSE IS ADDED IN THE LAST SUBCK LINE.  
2. LOCATION OF SECOND PULSE IS FULLY PROGRAMMABLE USING THE SUBCKHP TOGGLE POSITION REGISTERS.  
Figure 82. High Precision SUBCK Operation  
TRIGGER  
EXPOSURE  
(0x70)  
VD  
VSG  
tEXP  
SUBCK  
NOTES  
1. SUBCK CAN BE SUPPRESSED FOR MULTIPLE FIELDS BY PROGRAMMING THE EXPOSURE REGISTER TO BE GREATER THAN 0.  
2. THIS EXAMPLE USES EXPOSURE = 1.  
3. TRIGGER REGISTER MUST ALSO BE USED TO START THE LOW SPEED EXPOSURE.  
4. VD/HD OUTPUTS CAN ALSO BE SUPPRESSED USING THE VDHD_MASK REGISTER = 1.  
Figure 83. Low Speed SUBCK Operation (SUBCKMASK_SKIP1 = 1)  
Rev. B | Page 62 of 112  
 
 
 
AD9920A  
ShotTimer with RapidShot  
Manual exposure  
Manual readout  
FIELD COUNTERS  
The AD9920A contains three field counters (primary, secondary,  
and mode). When these counters are active, they increment with  
each VD cycle. The mode counter is the field counter used with  
the mode register to control the vertical timing signals (see the  
Mode Registers section).  
Force to idle  
The primary counter regulates the expose and read actions  
by regulating the SUBCK and VSG signals. In addition, if the  
RapidShot feature is used with the primary counter, the SUBCK  
and VSG masking automatically repeats as necessary for multiple  
expose/read cycles. The secondary counter has no effect on the  
SUBCK or VSG signal. Both counters can be used to regulate  
the general-purpose signals described in the General-Purpose  
Outputs (GPOs) section.  
The primary and secondary counters are more flexible and are  
generally used for shuttering signal applications. Both the primary  
and secondary counters have several modes of operation that  
are selected by Address 0x70. These modes are as follows:  
Normal (single count)  
RapidShot (repeating count)  
ShotTimer (delayed count)  
Table 44. Primary/Secondary Field Counter Registers (Address 0x70, Address 0x71, and Address 0x72)  
Register  
Length (Bits) Description  
PRIMARY_ACTION  
3
0 = idle, no counter action. GPO signals can still be controlled using polarity or by setting the  
appropriate GP_PROTOCOL register to 1.  
SECOND_ACTION  
3
1 = activate counter. Single cycle of counter from 1 to counter maximum value and then return to  
idle state.  
2 = RapidShot. After reaching the maximum counter value, the counter wraps and repeats until reset.  
3 = ShotTimer. Active single cycle of counter after added delay of n fields (use the corresponding  
DELAY register).  
4 = ShotTimer with RapidShot. Same as RapidShot (SECOND_ACTION register = 2) but with an added  
delay of n fields between each repetition.  
5 = manual exposure. Primary counter stays in exposure until manual readout or reset to idle.  
This mode keeps the SUBCK and VSG pulses masked indefinitely.  
6 = manual readout. Primary counter switches to readout (VSG pulses becomes active).  
7 = force to idle.  
PRIMARY_MAX  
SECOND_MAX  
VDHD_MASK  
13  
12  
3
Primary counter maximum value.  
Secondary counter maximum value.  
Mask VD/HD during counter operation.  
PRIMARY_DELAY  
13  
ShotTimer. Number of fields to delay before the next primary count (exposure) starts. If using  
ShotTimer with RapidShot, the delay value is used between each repetition.  
PRIMARY_SKIP  
1
When using ShotTimer with RapidShot, use the primary delay value only before the first count (exposure).  
SECOND_DELAY  
13  
ShotTimer. Number of fields to delay before the next secondary count starts. If using ShotTimer with  
RapidShot, the delay value is used between each repetition.  
SECOND_SKIP  
1
When using ShotTimer with RapidShot, use the secondary delay value only before the first count.  
Rev. B | Page 63 of 112  
 
 
AD9920A  
3. Program the counter parameters (Address 0x71 to  
Address 0x72).  
4. Activate the counter (Address 0x70).  
GENERAL-PURPOSE OUTPUTS (GPOs)  
The AD9920A provides programmable outputs to control a  
mechanical shutter, the strobe/flash, the CCD bias select signal,  
or any other external component with general-purpose (GP)  
signals. Eight GP signals, with up to four toggles each, are  
available to be programmed and assigned to special GPO pins.  
These pins are bidirectional and allow visibility (as an output)  
and external control (as an input) of HBLK, PBLK, CLPOB, and  
OUT_CONTROL. The GPO registers are described in Table 45.  
For Protocol 1 (no counter association), skip Step 3 and Step 4.  
With these four steps, the GP signals can be programmed to  
accomplish many common tasks. Careful protocol selection and  
application of the field counters yields efficient results to allow  
the GP signals smooth integration with concurrent operations.  
Note that the SUBCK and VSG masks are linked to the primary  
counter; however, if their parameters are 0, the GPO can use the  
primary counter without expose/read activity.  
Note that GPO5 and GPO6 are used to control the SG signals  
for the V5 and V6 outputs of the AD9920A. See the SG Control  
Using GPO section for more information.  
The secondary counter is independent and can be used simul-  
taneously with the primary counter. Some applications may  
require the use of both primary and secondary field counters  
with different GPO protocols, start times, and durations. Such  
operations are easily handled by the AD9920A.  
GP Toggles  
When configured as an output, each GPO output can deliver a  
signal that is the result of programmable toggle positions. The  
GP signals are independent and can be linked to a specific VD  
period or to a range of VD periods via the primary or secondary  
field counters through the GP protocol register (Address 0x73).  
As a result of their associations with the field counters, the GP  
toggles inherit the characteristics of the field counters, such as  
RapidShot and ShotTimer.  
Several simple examples of GPO applications using only one  
GPO and one field counter follow. These examples can be used  
as building blocks for more complex GPO activity. In addition,  
specific GPO signals can be passed through a four-input lookup  
table (LUT) to realize combinational logic between them. For  
example, GP1 and GP2 can be sent through an XOR lookup  
table, and the result can be delivered on GP1, GP2, or both. In  
addition, GP1 or GP2 can deliver its original toggles.  
To program the GP toggles, complete the following steps:  
1. Program the toggle positions (Address 0x7C to  
Address 0xAB).  
2. Program the GP protocol (Address 0x73).  
Table 45. GPO Registers  
Register  
Length (Bits) Range  
Description  
GP1_PROTOCOL  
GP2_PROTOCOL  
GP3_PROTOCOL  
GP4_PROTOCOL  
GP5_PROTOCOL  
GP6_PROTOCOL  
GP7_PROTOCOL  
GP8_PROTOCOL  
MANUAL_TRIG  
GP[1:8]_POL  
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
8
8
8
0 to 7  
0 to 7  
0 to 7  
0 to 7  
0 to 7  
0 to 7  
0 to 7  
0 to 7  
On/off  
Low/high  
On/off  
0 = idle  
1 = no counter association; use MANUAL_TRIG bits to enable each GP signal.  
2 = test only.  
3 = test only.  
4 = link to mode counter (from vertical timing generation).  
5 = link to primary counter (also allows GP signals to repeat with RapidShot).  
6 = link to secondary counter (also allows GP signals to repeat with RapidShot).  
7 = keep on.  
Manual trigger for each GP signal. For use with Protocol 1.  
Starting polarity for GP signals. Only updated when GPx_PROTOCOL = 0.  
1 = select GP toggles visible at GPO1 to GPO4, GPO7, and GPO8 when output is  
enabled (default).  
SEL_GP[1:8]  
0 = select vertical signals visible at GPO4 to GPO8 when output is enabled.  
GPO4: XSUBCK.  
GPO5: XV21.  
GPO6: XV22.  
GPO7: XV23.  
GPO8: XV24.  
GPO_OUTPUT_EN  
8
On/off  
1 = enable GPO1 to GPO4, GPO7, and GPO8 outputs (one bit per output).  
0 = disable GPO1 to GPO4, GPO7, and GPO8 outputs; pins are high-Z (default).  
GPx_USE_LUT  
LUT_FOR_GP12  
LUT_FOR_GP34  
LUT_FOR_GP56  
8
4
4
4
On/off  
Send GP signals through a programmable lookup table (LUT).  
Desired logic to be realized on GPO1 combined with GPO2.  
Desired logic to be realized on GPO3 combined with GPO4.  
Desired logic to be realized on GPO5 combined with GPO6.  
Logic setting  
Logic setting  
Logic setting  
Rev. B | Page 64 of 112  
 
 
 
AD9920A  
Register  
Length (Bits) Range  
Description  
LUT_FOR_GP78  
4
Logic setting  
Desired logic to be realized on GPO7 combined with GPO8.  
Example logic settings for LUT_FOR_GPxy:  
0x06 = GPy XOR GPx (see Figure 89).  
0x07 = GPy NAND GPx.  
0x08 = GPy AND GPx.  
0x0E = GPy OR GPx.  
GPx_TOGx_FD  
GPx_TOGx_LN  
GPx_TOGx_PX  
GPO_INT_EN  
13  
13  
13  
1
0 to 8191 fields Field of activity, relative to primary and secondary counter for corresponding toggle.  
0 to 8191 lines Line of activity for corresponding toggle.  
0 to 8191 pixels Pixel of activity for corresponding toggle.  
On/off  
When set to 1, internal signals are viewable on GPO1 to GPO3. Also, set the  
SEL_GPx bit low to output internal signals.  
GPO1 = internal clock.  
GPO2 = CLPOB.  
GPO3 = delayed sample clock.  
Rev. B | Page 65 of 112  
AD9920A  
Single-Field Toggles  
Scheduled Toggles  
Single-field toggles occur in the next field only. There can be up to  
four toggles in the field. The mode is set with GP_PROTOCOL  
equal to 1, and the toggles are triggered in the next field by  
writing to the MANUAL_TRIG register (Register 0x70, Bits[13:6]).  
In this mode, the field toggle settings must be set to a value of 1.  
Two consecutive fields do not have activity. If toggles are required  
to repeat in the next field, the MANUAL_TRIG register can be  
written to in consecutive fields.  
Scheduled toggles are programmed to occur during upcoming  
fields. For example, there can be one toggle in Field 1, two  
toggles in Field 3, and a last toggle in Field 4. The mode is set  
with GP_PROTOCOL = 5 or GP_PROTOCOL = 6. Mode 5  
tells the GPO to obey the primary field counter, and Mode 6  
tells the GPO to obey the secondary field counter.  
Note that for GP_PROTOCOL = 5 or GP_PROTOCOL = 6, at  
least one toggle must be programmed in Field 1 for the AD9920A  
to output the proper pattern on the GPO pins. If no toggle is  
programmed in Field 1, all subsequent toggle positions are  
ignored when GP_PROTOCOL = 5 or GP_PROTOCOL = 6.  
This restriction applies only to GP_PROTOCOL = 5 or  
GP_PROTOCOL = 6.  
Preparation  
The GP toggle positions can be programmed any time prior to  
use. For example,  
0x7C  
0x7D  
0x7E  
0x7F  
0x80  
0x81  
← 0x000A001  
← 0x0002000  
← 0x000000F  
← 0x00C4002  
← 0x0004000  
← 0x00000B3  
Preparation  
The GP toggle positions can be programmed any time prior to  
use. For example,  
0x7C  
0x7D  
0x7E  
← 0x00C4001  
← 0x0004000  
← 0x00000B3  
Details  
A) Field 0:  
0x70  
0x73  
← 0x0000040  
← 0x0000001  
Details  
B) Field 1:  
0x73  
← 0x0000000  
A) Field 0:  
0x70  
0x73  
← 0x0000008  
← 0x0000006  
VD  
1
2
VD  
1
A
REGISTER WRITE  
GP1_PROTOCOL  
A
B
REGISTER WRITE  
GP1_PROTOCOL  
GPO1  
0
0
6
1
0
1
0
SECONDARY  
COUNT  
2
0
(IDLE)  
GPO1  
NOTES  
1. THE FIELD TOGGLE POSITION MUST BE SET TO 1 WHEN  
GP PROTOCOL IS 1.  
CAUTION! THE GP_PROTOCOL MUST BE RESET BEFORE  
USING AGAIN.  
CAUTION! THE PRIMARY COUNTER REGULATES THE SUBCK  
AND VSG ACTIVITY. LINK A GPO TO THE PRIMARY COUNTER  
ONLY IF SUBCK AND VSG ACTIVITY WILL OCCUR DURING  
EXPOSURE/READ.  
Figure 85. Scheduled Toggles Using GP_PROTOCOL = 6  
Figure 84. Single-Field Toggles Using GP_PROTOCOL = 1  
Rev. B | Page 66 of 112  
AD9920A  
RapidShot Sequences  
ShotTimer Sequences  
RapidShot technology provides continuous repetition of  
scheduled toggles.  
ShotTimer technology provides internal delay of scheduled  
toggles. The delay is in terms of fields.  
Preparation  
Preparation  
The GP toggle positions can be programmed any time prior to  
use. For example,  
The GP toggle positions can be programmed any time prior to  
use. For example,  
0x71  
0x7C  
0x7D  
0x7E  
0x7F  
0x80  
0x81  
0x73  
← 0x0004000  
← 0x000A001  
← 0x0002000  
← 0x000000F  
← 0x00C4002  
← 0x0004000  
← 0x00000B3  
← 0x0000006  
0x71  
0x72  
0x7C  
0x7D  
0x7E  
0x73  
← 0x0004000  
← 0x000C000  
← 0x000A001  
← 0x0002000  
← 0x000000F  
← 0x0000006  
Details  
A) Field 0:  
0x70  
← 0x0000018  
Details  
A) Field 0:  
B) Field 2:  
0x70  
0x70  
← 0x0000010  
← 0x0000007  
2
VD  
1
A
REGISTER WRITE  
GP1_PROTOCOL  
1
2
3
4
5
VD  
0
6
1
A
B
REGISTER WRITE  
GP1_PROTOCOL  
SECONDARY  
COUNT  
0 (IDLE)  
2
3
1
2
0
0
6
1
GPO1  
SECONDARY  
COUNT  
0 (IDLE)  
2
1
2
1
0
Figure 87. ShotTimer Toggle Operation Using GP_PROTOCOL = 6  
GPO1  
TERMINATED  
AT VD EDGE  
CAUTION! THE FIELD COUNTER MUST BE FORCED INTO IDLE  
STATE TO TERMINATE REPETITIONS.  
Figure 86. RapidShot Toggle Operation Using GP_PROTOCOL = 6  
Rev. B | Page 67 of 112  
AD9920A  
GP LOOKUP TABLE (LUT)  
Table 46. LUT Results Based on GP1 and GP2 Values  
The AD9920A is equipped with a lookup table for each pair  
of consecutive GP signals when configured as outputs. GPO1 is  
always combined with GPO2, GPO3 is always combined with  
GPO4, GPO5 is always combined with GPO6, and GPO7 is  
always combined with GPO8. The external GPO outputs from  
each pair can output the result of the LUT or the original GP  
internal signal.  
GP2 GP1 LUT: XOR LUT: NAND LUT: AND LUT: OR  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
LUT_FOR_GP12[11:8] = 0x06  
GP2_USE_LUT = 1 GP1_USE_LUT = 0  
GP1_USE_LUT  
GP1  
GP2  
0
GPO1  
GPO2  
GP1  
1
GPO1  
LUT  
NOTES  
GP2  
1
1. LOGIC COMBINATION (XOR) OF PROGRAMMED TOGGLES  
GP1 AND GP2.  
GPO2  
Figure 89. LUT Example for GP1 XOR GP2  
0
Field Counter and GPO Limitations  
GP2_USE_LUT  
The following is a summary of the known limitations of the  
field counters and GPO signals.  
Figure 88. Internal LUT for GPO1 and GPO2 Signals  
Address 0x7B configures the behavior of the LUT and which  
signals receive the result. Each 4-bit LUT_FOR_GPxy register  
can realize any logic combination of GPx and GPy. For example,  
Table 46 shows how the register values of LUT_FOR_GP12,  
Bits[11:8], are determined. XOR, NAND, AND, and OR results  
are shown, but any 4-bit combination is possible. A simple  
example of XOR gating is shown in Figure 89.  
The field counter trigger (PRIMARY_ACTION and  
SECOND_ACTION registers, Address 0x70) is  
automatically reset at the start of every VD period.  
Therefore, there must be one VD period between  
sequential programming to that address.  
If GPx_PROTOCOL = 1, it must be manually reset to  
GPx_PROTOCOL = 0 one VD period before it can be  
used again. If manual toggles are desired in sequential  
fields, the MANUAL_TRIG register should be used in  
conjunction with GPx_PROTOCOL = 1.  
Rev. B | Page 68 of 112  
 
 
 
AD9920A  
Write to the mode registers to configure the next five fields.  
The first two fields during exposure are the same as the  
current draft mode fields, and the following three fields are  
the still image frame readout fields. The register settings  
for the draft mode field and the three readout fields are  
previously programmed. Note that if the mode registers are  
changed to VD updated, only one field of exposure should  
be included (the second one) because the mode settings are  
delayed an extra field.  
COMPLETE EXPOSURE/READOUT OPERATION  
USING PRIMARY COUNTER AND GPO SIGNALS  
Figure 90 illustrates a typical expose/read cycle while exercising  
the GPO signals. Using a three-field CCD with an exposure time  
that is greater than one field but less than two fields in duration  
requires a total of five fields for the entire exposure/readout  
operation. Other exposure times and CCD field configurations  
require modification of these example settings.  
Note that if the mode registers are changed to be VD updated,  
as shown in the Mode Registers section and in Figure 63, the  
mode update is delayed by one additional field. This should be  
accounted for in selecting the number of fields to cycle and in  
determining which VD location to write to the mode registers.  
2. VD/HD falling edge updates the serial writes from 1.  
3. GP3 (VSUB) output turns on at the field/line/pixel specified.  
In Figure 90, VSUB Example 1 and Example 2 use  
GP3TOG1_FD = 1.  
4. GP1 (STROBE) output turns on and off at the location  
specified.  
5. GP2 (MSHUT) output turns off at the location specified.  
6. The next VD falling edge automatically starts the first  
read field.  
7. The next VD falling edge automatically starts the second  
read field.  
1. The primary counter is used to control the masking  
of VSG and SUBCK during exposure/readout. The  
PRIMARY_MAX register (Address 0x71) should be set  
equal to the total number of fields used for exposure and  
readout. In this example, PRIMARY_MAX = 5.  
The SUBCK masking should not occur immediately at  
the next VD edge (Step 2) because this would define an  
exposure time that begins in the previous field. Write to  
the PRIMARY_DELAY register (Address 0x72) to delay  
the masking of VSG and SUBCK pulses in the first  
exposure field. In this example, PRIMARY_DELAY = 1.  
8. The next VD falling edge automatically starts the third  
read field.  
9. Write to the mode register to reconfigure the single draft  
mode field timing. Note that if the mode registers are changed  
to VD updated, this write should occur one field earlier.  
10. VD/HD falling edge updates the serial writes from 9.  
VSG outputs return to draft mode timing. SUBCK output  
resumes operation. GP2 (MSHUT) output returns to the  
on position (active or open). GP3 (VSUB) output returns  
to the off position (inactive).  
Write to the SUBCKMASK_NUM register (Address 0x74) to  
specify the number of fields to mask SUBCK while the CCD  
data is read. In this example, SUBCKMASK_NUM = 4.  
Write to the SGMASK_NUM register (Address 0x74) to  
specify the number of fields to mask VSG outputs during  
exposure. In this example, SGMASK_NUM = 1.  
Write to the PRIMARY_ACTION register (Address 0x70)  
to trigger the GP1 (STROBE), GP2 (MSHUT), and GP3  
(VSUB) signals and to start the expose/read operation.  
Rev. B | Page 69 of 112  
 
AD9920A  
9 0 8 - 8 7 0 6  
Figure 90. Complete Exposure/Readout Operation Using Primary Counter and GPO Signals  
Rev. B | Page 70 of 112  
 
AD9920A  
A serial write to the GP5_PROTOCOL register is used to set  
SG CONTROL USING GPO  
the protocol of GPO5 equal to 1 (no counter association). The  
manual trigger bit for GPO5 (Address 0x70, Bit 10) is then  
written on the field previous to the field that requires the GPO5  
(SG) signal. At the end of the readout, the GP5_PROTOCOL  
register can be reset to 0 (idle).  
The AD9920A uses two of the GPO signals to generate the SG  
signals for the three-level outputs V5 and V6. Because GPO5  
and GPO6 are used as inputs to the vertical driver, they must  
be properly initialized at power-up to avoid incorrect V-driver  
output levels. During different CCD timing modes, the GPO  
signals can be controlled in several ways to produce the proper  
SG signal operation.  
Triggered Control of GPO5  
Figure 93 shows the 19-channel mode, again with GPO5 used  
to control the SG signal for the V5 output. In this configuration,  
however, the secondary counter (scheduled toggles) method is  
used. A serial write to the GP5_PROTOCOL register is used to  
set the protocol of GPO5 equal to 6 (link to secondary counter).  
At the start of the exposure, the field toggle location for GPO5 is  
programmed to the desired field count value to trigger the GPO5  
signal. Then, the secondary counter is triggered. The secondary  
counter automatically increments and generates the GPO pulse  
in the proper field location during readout. At the end of the  
readout, the GPO5 protocol is automatically reset to idle.  
GPO5/GPO6 Power-Up Settings  
GPO5 and GPO6 should be programmed with a polarity of  
high at power-up by setting the GP5_POL and GP6_POL bits  
(Address 0x7A, Bits[5:4]) equal to 11. This setting provides the  
correct polarity in the V-driver, because the XSG signals should  
be active low at the V-driver inputs. At power-up, the GPO5  
and GPO6 outputs should also be enabled, by setting Register  
Address 0x7A, Bits[21:20] and Bits[13:12] all equal to 1, so that  
there is a defined state at all times.  
Manual Control of GPO5  
The advantage of using the secondary counter is that no serial  
writes are required during exposure or readout, unlike the manual  
control method. The disadvantage is that more information must  
be programmed before the start of exposure, such as the exact  
field location where the GPO pulse is needed, taking into  
account the length of the exposure and readout fields.  
Figure 91 shows an example exposure/readout sequence of the  
AD9920A used in 18-channel mode without any GPO signals  
used for SG control. Figure 92 shows the 19-channel mode,  
with GPO5 used to control the SG signal for the V5 output. In  
this configuration, the GPO manual control method is used.  
SERIAL  
1
6
WRITES  
2
3
4
5
7
VD  
STILL IMAGE READOUT  
VSG  
7
tEXP  
SUBCK  
OPEN  
OPEN  
MECHANICAL  
SHUTTER  
CLOSED  
STILL IMAGE  
FIRST FIELD  
STILL IMAGE  
SECOND FIELD  
STILL IMAGE  
THIRD FIELD  
DRAFT IMAGE DRAFT IMAGE  
DRAFT IMAGE  
CCD  
OUT  
Figure 91. Exposure/Readout Operation Without Using GPO for SG Signal  
Rev. B | Page 71 of 112  
 
 
 
AD9920A  
SERIAL  
WRITES  
7
1
5
2
3
4
6
8
VD  
STILL IMAGE READOUT  
VSG  
(XSG1 TO XSG7)  
8
GPO5  
(XSG8 FOR V5)  
tEXP  
SUBCK  
OPEN  
OPEN  
MECHANICAL  
SHUTTER  
CLOSED  
STILL IMAGE  
FIRST FIELD  
STILL IMAGE  
SECOND FIELD  
STILL IMAGE  
THIRD FIELD  
DRAFT IMAGE DRAFT IMAGE  
DRAFT IMAGE  
CCD  
OUT  
Figure 92. Using GPO5 Manual Trigger Mode for SG Signal  
SERIAL  
WRITES  
1
6
2
3
4
5
7
VD  
STILL IMAGE READOUT  
VSG  
(XSG1 TO XSG7)  
7
GPO5  
(XSG8 FOR V5)  
SECONDARY  
COUNT  
0 (IDLE)  
1
2
3
4
5
0
tEXP  
SUBCK  
MECHANICAL  
SHUTTER  
OPEN  
OPEN  
CLOSED  
STILL IMAGE  
FIRST FIELD  
STILL IMAGE  
SECOND FIELD  
STILL IMAGE  
THIRD FIELD  
DRAFT IMAGE DRAFT IMAGE  
DRAFT IMAGE  
CCD  
OUT  
Figure 93. Using GPO5 with Secondary Counter to Control SG Signal  
Rev. B | Page 72 of 112  
 
 
AD9920A  
Shutter Operation in SLR Mode  
MANUAL SHUTTER OPERATION USING  
ENHANCED SYNC MODES  
The following steps are shown in Figure 99.  
The AD9920A also supports an external signal to control exposure,  
using the SYNC input. Generally, the SYNC input is used as an  
asynchronous reset signal during master mode operation. When  
the enhanced SYNC mode is enabled, the SYNC input provides  
additional control of the exposure operation.  
1. To turn on VSUB, write to the appropriate GP registers to  
trigger VSUB and start the manual exposure (PRIMARY_  
ACTION = 5). This change takes effect after the next VD.  
SUBCK is suppressed during the exposure and readout  
phases.  
2. To turn on MSHUT during the interval between the next  
VD and SYNC, write to the appropriate GP register. When  
MSHUT is in the on position, it has line and pixel control.  
This change takes effect on the SYNC falling edge because  
there is an internal VD.  
Normal SYNC Mode (Mode 1)  
By default, the SYNC input is used in master mode to synchronize  
the internal counters of the AD9920A with external timing. The  
horizontal, vertical, and field designator signals are reset by the  
rising edge of the SYNC pulse. Figure 94 shows how this mode  
operates, highlighting the behavior of the mode field designator.  
3. If the mode register is programmed to cycle through  
multiple fields (5, 7, 3, 5, 7, 3, …, in this example), the  
internal field designator increments. If the mode register  
is not required to increment, set up the mode register such  
that it outputs only one field. This prevents the mode  
counter from incrementing during the SYNC interval.  
4. Write to the manual readout trigger to begin the manual  
readout (PRIMARY_ACTION = 6). Write to the appropriate  
GP registers to trigger MSHUT to toggle low at the end of  
the exposure. This change takes effect on the SYNC rising  
edge during readout. Because VD register update is disabled,  
the trigger takes effect on the SYNC rising edge. The MSHUT  
falling edge is aligned with the SYNC rising edge. Because  
the MSHUT falling edge is aligned with VD, it may be  
necessary to insert a dummy VD to delay the readout.  
Enhanced SYNC Modes (Mode 2 and Mode 3)  
The enhanced SYNC modes can be used to accommodate unique  
synchronization requirements during exposure operations. In  
SYNC Mode 2, the V and VSG outputs are suspended and the  
VD output is masked. The V-outputs are held at the dc value  
established by the V-Sequence 0 start polarities. There is no SCP  
operation, but the H-counter is still enabled. Finally, the AFE  
sampling clocks, HD, H/RG, CLPOB, and HBLK, are operational  
and use V-Sequence 0 behavior. See Figure 95 for more details.  
To enable the enhanced SYNC modes, set the ENH_SYNC_EN  
register (Address 0x13, Bit 3) to 1.  
SYNC Mode 3 uses all the features of Mode 2, but the V-outputs  
are continuous through the SYNC pulse interval. VD control  
pulses are masked during the SYNC interval, and the HD pulse  
can also be masked, if required (see Figure 96).  
Because the internal exposure counter (the primary counter) is  
not used during manual SYNC mode operation and the VD  
register update is disabled, control is lost on the fine placement  
of the GP signals for VSUB, MSHUT, and STROBE edges while  
SYNC is low.  
It is important to note that in both enhanced modes, the SYNC  
pulse resets the counters at both the falling edge and the rising  
edge of the SYNC pulse.  
Serial Registers for Enhanced SYNC Modes  
Register Update and Field Designator  
SYNC Mode 2 and SYNC Mode 3 are controlled using the  
registers listed in Table 47. These registers are located at  
Address 0x13, Bits[6:3].  
When using SYNC Mode 2 or SYNC Mode 3, VD-updated  
registers, such as PRIMARY_ACTION, are not updated during  
the SYNC interval, and the SCP0 function is ignored and held  
at 0 (see Figure 97).  
Table 47. Registers for Enhanced SYNC Modes  
Length  
(Bits)  
When using either SYNC Mode 2 or SYNC Mode 3, both the  
rising and falling edges increment the internal field designator;  
therefore, the new register data takes effect and VTP information is  
updated to new SEQ0 data. However, this does not occur if the  
mode register is creating an output of one field. In that case, the  
region, sequence, and group information does not change (see  
Figure 98).  
Register  
Description  
ENH_SYNC_EN  
1
High active to enable masking  
(default low)  
High active to enable masking  
(default high)  
High active to enable masking  
(default high)  
High active to enable masking  
(default low)  
SYNC_MASK_V  
SYNC_MASK_VD  
SYNC_MASK_HD  
1
1
1
Rev. B | Page 73 of 112  
 
 
AD9920A  
SYNC  
VD  
FIELD  
DESIGNATOR  
7
3
5
SUSPEND  
HD  
H1 TO H4, RG, XV1  
TO XV24,  
VSG, SUBCK  
NOTES  
1. THE SYNC RISING EDGE RESETS VD/HD AND COUNTERS TO 0.  
2. SYNC POLARITY IS PROGRAMMABLE USING SYNCPOL REGISTER (ADDR 0x13).  
3. DURING SYNC LOW, ALL INTERNAL COUNTERS ARE RESET AND VD/HD CAN BE SUSPENDED USING THE SYNCSUSPEND REGISTER (ADDR 0x13).  
4. THE SYNC RISING EDGE CAUSES THE INTERNAL FIELD DESIGNATOR TO INCREMENT.  
5. IF SYNCSUSPEND = 1, VERTICAL CLOCKS, H1 TO H4, AND RG ARE HELD AT THE SAME POLARITY SPECIFIED BY OUT_CONTROL = LOW.  
6. IF SYNCSUSPEND = 0, ALL CLOCK OUTPUTS CONTINUE TO OPERATE NORMALLY UNTIL THE SYNC RESET EDGE.  
Figure 94. Normal SYNC (Default Mode 1)  
2
1
SYNC  
3
VD  
HD  
VDLEN  
4
SCP  
5
XV1 TO XV24  
1
2
3
4
5
FALLING EDGE RESYNCS THE CIRCUIT TO THE LINE/PIXEL NUMBER 0. VD AND HD INTERNALLY RESYNC.  
RISING EDGE RESETS COUNTERS.  
VD IS DISABLED DURING SYNC. THE REGISTER IS PROGRAMMABLE.  
SCP, HBLK, AND CLPOB ARE HELD AT SEQ0 VALUE.  
XV1 TO XV24 SIGNALS ARE HELD AT THE V-OUTPUT START POLARITY.  
Figure 95. Enhanced SYNC Mode 2 with Vertical Signals Held at VTP Start Value  
Rev. B | Page 74 of 112  
 
 
AD9920A  
SYNC  
1
2
VD  
HD  
VDLEN  
SCP  
3
XV1 TO XV24  
1
2
3
SYNC_MASK_VD REGISTER ENABLES MASKING OF VD DURING SYNCSUSPEND WHEN SET HIGH (DEFAULT).  
SYNC_MASK_HD REGISTER ENABLES MASKING OF HD DURING SYNCSUSPEND WHEN SET HIGH (DEFAULT).  
V-OUTPUT PULSES CONTINUE IN SEQUENCE.  
Figure 96. Enhanced SYNC Mode 3  
SYNC  
VD  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
VD REGISTERS ARE UPDATED HERE.  
NOTES  
1. VD-UPDATED REGISTERS (FOR EXAMPLE, PRIMARY_ACTION) ARE DISABLED DURING THE SYNC INTERVAL.  
Figure 97. Register Update Behavior  
SYNC  
VD  
FIELD  
DESIGNATOR  
5
7
3
5
7
1
1
1
FIELD DESIGNATOR IS INCREMENTED ON BOTH SYNC EDGES.  
Figure 98. Enhanced SYNC Mode Effect on Field Designator  
Rev. B | Page 75 of 112  
 
 
 
AD9920A  
4
SYNC  
1
2
VD  
3
FIELD  
DESIGNATOR  
3
5
7
3
5
7
3
5
7
V-OUTPUTS  
MSHUT  
VSUB  
5
5
DUMMY  
FIELD  
READOUT READOUT  
ODD EVEN  
DRAFT  
EXPOSURE  
DRAFT  
SHUTTER OPERATION IN SLR MODE  
1
REFER TO STEP 1.  
2
REFER TO STEP 2.  
3
REFER TO STEP 3.  
4
REFER TO STEP 4.  
5
SUBCK OUTPUT IS SUPPRESSED DURING EXPOSURE AND READOUT WHEN EXPOSURE TRIGGER IS USED.  
Figure 99. Enhanced SYNC Mode—Manual Shutter Operation, SLR Mode  
Rev. B | Page 76 of 112  
 
AD9920A  
ANALOG FRONT END DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION  
0.1µF 0.1µF  
AVDD  
REFB REFT  
0.4V 1.4V  
AD9920A  
DC RESTORE  
0.5V  
FIXED  
DELAY  
1
0
CLI  
DOUTPHASE  
0
1
SHP  
PBLK  
DCLK  
INTERNAL  
V
DCBYP  
REF  
DCLK  
MODE  
SHP  
SHD  
DOUTDELAY  
2V  
DCLKINV  
12  
FULL  
SCALE  
6dB  
VGA  
1
S1  
0.1µF  
CCDIN  
12-BIT  
ADC  
OUTPUT  
DATA  
LATCH  
D0 TO D11  
CDS  
–3dB, 0dB,  
+3dB, +6dB  
PBLK  
PBLK  
OPTICAL BLACK  
CLAMP  
1
S2  
DAC  
CDS GAIN  
REGISTER  
CLPOB PBLK  
DIGITAL  
FILTER  
BLANK TO  
ZERO OR  
CLAMP LEVEL  
DOUTPHASE  
SHP SHD  
CLAMP LEVEL  
REGISTER  
CLPOB PBLK  
VD  
HD  
PRECISION  
V-H  
CLI  
TIMING  
TIMING  
GENERATOR  
GENERATION  
1
S1 IS NORMALLY CLOSED; S2 IS NORMALLY OPEN.  
Figure 100. Analog Front End Functional Block Diagram  
The AD9920A signal processing chain is shown in Figure 100.  
Each processing step is essential for achieving a high quality  
image from the raw CCD pixel data.  
Note that because the CDS input is shorted during PBLK, the  
CLPOB pulse should not be used during the same active time as  
the PBLK pulse.  
DC Restore  
Correlated Double Sampler (CDS)  
To reduce the large dc offset of the CCD output signal, a dc  
restore circuit is used with an external 0.1 μF series coupling  
capacitor. This restores the dc level of the CCD signal to  
approximately 1.3 V (AVDD − 0.5 V), making it compatible  
with the 1.8 V core supply voltage of the AD9920A. The dc  
restore switch is active during the SHP sample pulse time.  
The CDS circuit samples each CCD pixel twice to extract the  
video information and to reject low frequency noise. The timing  
shown in Figure 23 illustrates how the two internally generated  
CDS clocks, SHP and SHD, are used to sample the reference  
level and data level of the CCD signal, respectively. The place-  
ment of the SHP and SHD sampling edges is determined by the  
setting of the SHPLOC and SHDLOC registers located at  
Address 0x38. Placement of these two clock signals is critical  
for achieving the best performance from the CCD.  
The dc restore circuit can be disabled when the optional PBLK  
signal is used to isolate large-signal swings from the CCD input  
(see the Analog Preblanking section). Bit 6 of AFE Register  
Address 0x00 controls whether the dc restore is active during  
the PBLK interval.  
The CDS gain is variable in four steps by using AFE Register  
Address 0x04: −3 dB, 0 dB, +3 dB, and +6 dB. Improved noise  
performance results from using the +3 dB setting, but the input  
range is reduced (see the Analog Specifications section).  
Analog Preblanking (PBLK)  
During certain CCD blanking or substrate clocking intervals, the  
CCD input signal to the AD9920A may increase in amplitude  
beyond the recommended input range. The PBLK signal can be  
used to isolate the CDS input from large-signal swings. While  
PBLK is active (low), the CDS input is internally shorted to  
ground. It is recommended that PBLK be used to protect the  
CDS input during the horizontal blanking and/or when the  
SUBCK output is toggled.  
Rev. B | Page 77 of 112  
 
 
 
AD9920A  
Variable Gain Amplifier (VGA)  
Note that if the CLPOB loop is disabled, higher VGA gain  
settings reduce the dynamic range because the uncorrected  
offset in the signal path is gained up.  
The VGA stage provides a gain range of approximately 6 dB to  
42 dB, programmable with 10-bit resolution through the serial  
digital interface. A gain of 6 dB is needed to match a 1 V input  
signal with the ADC full-scale range of 2 V. When compared with  
1 V full-scale systems, the equivalent gain range is 0 dB to 36 dB.  
The CLPOB pulse should be aligned with the CCD optical black  
pixels. It is recommended that the CLPOB pulse duration be at  
least 20 pixels wide. Shorter pulse widths can be used, but the  
ability of the loop to track low frequency variations in the black  
level is reduced. See the Horizontal Timing Sequence Example  
section for timing examples.  
The VGA gain curve follows a linear-in-dB characteristic. The  
exact VGA gain is calculated for any gain register value by  
Gain (dB) = (0.0358 × Code) + 5.76 dB  
Digital Data Outputs  
where Code is the range of 0 to 1023.  
The AD9920A digital output data is latched using the rising  
edge of the DOUTPHASE register value, as shown in Figure 100.  
Output data timing is shown in Figure 25 and Figure 26. It is  
also possible to leave the output latches transparent so that the  
data outputs are valid immediately from the ADC. Programming  
Bit 1 in AFE Register Address 0x01 to 1 sets the output latches  
to transparent. The data outputs can also be disabled (three-  
stated) by setting Bit 0 in AFE Register Address 0x01 to 1.  
42  
36  
30  
24  
18  
12  
6
The DCLK output can be used for external latching of the  
data outputs. By default, the DCLK output tracks the values  
of the DOUTPHASE registers. By setting the DCLKMODE  
register, the DCLK output can be held at a fixed phase, and the  
DOUTPHASE register values are ignored. The DCLK output  
can also be inverted with respect to the data output, using the  
DCLKINV register bit.  
0
127  
255  
383  
511  
639  
767  
895  
1023  
VGA GAIN REGISTER CODE  
Figure 101. VGA Gain Curve  
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)  
The switching of the data outputs can couple noise back into  
the analog signal path. To minimize switching noise, it is  
recommended that the DOUTPHASE registers be set to the  
same edge as the SHP sampling location or up to 15 edges after  
the SHP sampling location. Other settings can produce good  
results, but experimentation is necessary. It is recommended  
that the DOUTPHASE location not occur between the SHD  
sampling location and 15 edges after the SHD location. For  
example, if SHDLOC = 0, DOUTPHASE should be set to an  
edge location of 16 or greater. If adjustable phase is not required  
for the data outputs, the output latch can be left transparent  
using Bit 1 in AFE Register Address 0x01.  
The AD9920A uses a high performance ADC architecture  
optimized for high speed and low power. Differential non-  
linearity (DNL) performance is typically better than 0.5 LSB.  
The ADC uses a 2 V input range. See Figure 6, Figure 7, and  
Figure 8 for typical linearity and noise performance plots for  
the AD9920A.  
Optical Black Clamp  
The optical black clamp loop is used to remove residual offsets  
in the signal chain and to track low frequency variations in the  
CCD black level. During the optical black (shielded) pixel interval  
on each line, the ADC output is compared with a fixed black  
level reference, which is selected by the user in the CLAMPLEVEL  
register. The value can be programmed from 0 LSB to 255 LSB  
in 1023 steps.  
The data output coding is normally straight binary, but the  
coding can be changed to gray coding by setting Bit 2 in AFE  
Register Address 0x01 to 1.  
The resulting error signal is filtered to reduce noise, and the  
correction value is applied to the ADC input through a DAC.  
Normally, the optical black clamp loop is turned on once per  
horizontal line, but this loop can be updated more slowly to suit  
a particular application. If external digital clamping is used during  
the postprocessing, the AD9920A optical black clamping can be  
disabled using Bit 2 in AFE Register Address 0x00. When the  
loop is disabled, the CLAMPLEVEL register can still be used to  
provide fixed offset adjustment.  
Rev. B | Page 78 of 112  
AD9920A  
APPLICATIONS INFORMATION  
7. Load the required registers to configure vertical timing,  
horizontal timing, high speed timing, and shutter timing.  
RST  
POWER-UP SEQUENCE FOR MASTER MODE  
When the AD9920A is powered up, the following sequence is  
recommended (refer to Figure 102 for each step). Note that a  
SYNC signal is required for master mode operation. If an external  
SYNC pulse is not available, it is possible to generate an internal  
SYNC event by writing to the SWSYNC register.  
8. Reset the internal timing core (TGCORE_ ). If a 2× clock  
is used for CLI, the CLIDIVIDE register (Address 0x0D)  
RST  
should be set to 1 before TGCORE_  
is written  
(Address 0x14 = 0x01). Wait at least 100 μs before  
performing Step 9.  
1. Turn on the 3 V and 1.8 V power supplies for the  
AD9920A and start master clock CLI.  
9. Bring the VDR_EN pin high. If driving VDR_EN with  
a GPO, write to the appropriate GPO polarity bit in  
Address 0x7A to set the VDR_EN signal high (updated at  
the next VD). Note that IOVDD must be at the same  
voltage as VDVDD if GPO is used for VDR_EN.  
10. Enable the AD9920A outputs (OUT_CONTROL register,  
Address 0x11 = 0x01). OUT_CONTROL is a VD-updated  
register; therefore, the outputs become active after the next  
VD falling edge.  
RST  
RST  
2. The SYNC/  
default. It must be brought high before any register writes  
RST  
pin is configured as the  
pin by  
are performed. Configure the SYNC/  
pin for SYNC  
functionality by writing Register 0x12 = 0x00, and then  
perform a software reset by writing Register 0x10 to 0x01.  
3. Make sure that VDR_EN is low. If driving VDR_EN with a  
GPO, set the appropriate bit in the GPO_OUTPUT_EN  
register (Address 0x7A, Bits[23:16]) to 1 to configure it as  
an output and make sure that the appropriate bit in the  
GP_STBY3 register (Address 0x27, Bits[15:8]) is set to 0.  
4. Power up the V-driver supplies.  
11. Enable master mode operation by setting Register 0x20 =  
0x01.  
12. Generate a SYNC event. SYNC should be high at power-  
up. Bring the SYNC input low for a minimum of 100 ns,  
and then bring SYNC high again. This resets the internal  
counters and starts VD/HD operation. The first VD/HD  
edge allows VD-updated register updates (including updates  
of OUT_CONTROL) to occur, enabling all outputs. If a  
hardware SYNC is not available, the SWSYNC register  
(Address 0x13, Bit 24) can be used to initiate a SYNC event.  
5. Define the standby status of the AD9920A vertical outputs.  
Write to the Standby2 and Standby3 polarity registers  
(Address 0x25 and Address 0x26 = 0x1FF8000).  
Write 0xFF8000 to Address 0x1C to configure the XV and  
VSG signals. Write 0x100000 to Register 0xD1. When using  
3-phase HCLK mode, enable this mode before Step 6 by  
setting Address 0x24 = 0x10.  
Note that VDR_EN must remain high to achieve proper vertical  
outputs during normal operation.  
6. Place the AFE into normal operation and enable clamping  
(Address 0x00 = 0x04). If using CLO to drive a crystal, set  
RST  
OSC_  
= 1. Wait at least 500 μs before performing Step 8.  
Rev. B | Page 79 of 112  
 
 
AD9920A  
4
1
VH SUPPLY  
+3V SUPPLIES  
+1.8V SUPPLY  
POWER  
SUPPLIES  
0V  
VM SUPPLY  
VL SUPPLY  
CLI  
(INPUT)  
SERIAL  
WRITES  
8
9
2
3
5
6
7
10  
11  
500µs  
100µs  
SYNC/RST  
12  
VD  
(INPUT)  
HD  
(INPUT)  
LOW BY  
DEFAULT  
XV1 TO XV24  
XSUBCK  
(INTERNAL)  
CLOCKS ACTIVE WHEN OUT_CONTROL  
REGISTER UPDATED AT VD/HD EDGE  
H2, H4, H6, H8  
HIGH-Z BY  
DEFAULT  
H-CLOCKS  
VDR_EN  
H1, H3, H5, H7, RG  
VDD  
0V  
V-DRIVER OUTPUTS ACTIVE  
WHEN VDR_EN IS HIGH  
VH  
V1 TO V16  
(V-DRIVER OUTPUT)  
VM  
VL (SUBCK ONLY)  
Figure 102. Recommended Power-Up Sequence and Synchronization, Master Mode  
Rev. B | Page 80 of 112  
 
AD9920A  
6. Place the AFE into normal operation and enable clamping  
(Address 0x00 = 0x04). If using CLO to drive a crystal, set  
POWER-UP SEQUENCE FOR SLAVE MODE  
When the AD9920A is used in slave mode, the VD/HD inputs  
are used to synchronize the internal counters. For more detail  
on the counter reset operation, see Figure 103.  
RST  
OSC_  
= 1. Wait at least 500 μs before performing Step 8.  
7. Load the required registers to configure vertical timing,  
horizontal timing, high speed timing, and shutter timing.  
1. Turn on the 3 V and 1.8 V power supplies for the  
AD9920A, and start master clock CLI.  
2. Reset the internal AD9920A registers.  
RST  
8. Reset the internal timing core (TGCORE_  
If a 2× clock is used for CLI, the CLIDIVIDE register  
RST  
).  
(Address 0x0D) should be set to 1 before TGCORE_  
is  
RST  
RST  
RST  
If the SYNC/  
pin is functioning as  
RST  
, apply a rising  
pin is function-  
written (Address 0x14 = 0x01). Wait at least 100 μs before  
performing Step 9.  
edge to the SYNC/  
pin. If the SYNC/  
ing as SYNC, tie this pin high. Then perform a software  
reset by writing Register 0x10 to 0x01.  
9. Bring the VDR_EN pin high. If driving VDR_EN with  
a GPO, write to the appropriate GPO polarity bit  
(Address 0x7A) to set the VDR_EN signal high (updated at  
the next VD). Note that IOVDD must be at the same  
voltage as VDVDD if GPO is used for VDR_EN.  
10. Enable the AD9920A outputs (OUT_CONTROL register,  
Address 0x11 = 0x01). OUT_CONTROL is a VD-updated  
register; therefore, the outputs become active after the next  
VD falling edge.  
11. Enable slave mode operation by setting Register 0x0E = 0x100.  
12. Start VD and HD timing to synchronize the internal  
counters and begin operation. VD-updated registers are  
updated at the first VD falling edge.  
3. Make sure that VDR_EN is low. If driving VDR_EN with a  
GPO, set the appropriate bit in the GPO_OUTPUT_EN  
register (Address 0x7A, Bits[23:16]) to 1 to configure it as  
an output and make sure that the appropriate bit in the  
GP_STBY3 register (Address 0x27, Bits[15:8]) is set to 0.  
4. Power up the V-driver supplies.  
5. Define the standby status of the AD9920A vertical outputs.  
Write to the Standby2 and Standby3 polarity registers  
(Address 0x25 and Address 0x26 = 0x1FF8000).  
Write 0xFF8000 to Address 0x1C to configure the XV  
and VSG signals. Write 0x100000 to Register 0xD1. When  
using 3-phase HCLK mode, enable this mode before Step 6  
by setting Address 0x24 = 0x10.  
Note that VDR_EN must remain high to achieve proper vertical  
outputs during normal operation.  
Rev. B | Page 81 of 112  
 
AD9920A  
4
1
VH SUPPLY  
+3V SUPPLIES  
+1.8V SUPPLY  
POWER  
SUPPLIES  
0V  
VM SUPPLY  
VL SUPPLY  
CLI  
(INPUT)  
SERIAL  
WRITES  
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
500µs  
100µs  
SYNC/RST  
12  
VD  
(INPUT)  
HD  
(INPUT)  
LOW BY  
DEFAULT  
XV1 TO XV24  
XSUBCK  
(INTERNAL)  
CLOCKS ACTIVE WHEN OUT_CONTROL  
REGISTER UPDATED AT VD/HD EDGE  
H2, H4, H6, H8  
HIGH-Z BY  
DEFAULT  
H1, H3, H5, H7, RG  
H-CLOCKS  
VDR_EN  
VDD  
0V  
V-DRIVER OUTPUTS ACTIVE  
VH WHEN VDR_EN IS HIGH  
V1 TO V16  
(V-DRIVER OUTPUT)  
VM  
VL (SUBCK ONLY)  
Figure 103. Recommended Power-Up Sequence and Synchronization, Slave Mode  
Rev. B | Page 82 of 112  
 
AD9920A  
3. Write 0x03 to the AFE standby register (Address 0x00) to  
place the AD9920A into Standby3 mode.  
4. Power down the V-driver supplies.  
POWER-DOWN SEQUENCE FOR MASTER AND  
SLAVE MODES  
1. Write 0 to the appropriate bit in the GPO_OUTPUT_EN  
register (Address 0x7A) to set the appropriate VDR_EN  
control signal low.  
5. Power down the 3 V and 1.8 V supplies.  
2. The next VD edge updates Address 0x7A, causing the  
VDR_EN signal to go low and disabling the V-driver  
outputs. If operating in slave mode, turn off VD and HD  
after VDR_EN switches low.  
4
VH SUPPLY  
5
+3V SUPPLIES  
+1.8V SUPPLIES  
POWER  
SUPPLIES  
0
V
VM SUPPLY  
VL SUPPLY  
1
2
3
SERIAL  
WRITES  
VD  
HD  
VDR_EN  
0V  
VM  
VL (SUBCK)  
V1 TO V15  
XSUBCK  
H-CLOCKS  
Figure 104. Recommended Power-Down Sequence, Master or Slave Mode  
Rev. B | Page 83 of 112  
 
AD9920A  
There is an inhibit area for SHPLOC to meet the timing  
requirement tCLISHP (see Figure 105, Figure 23, and Figure 24).  
This restriction is necessary to guarantee a stable reset of  
the H-counter in slave mode.  
When operating the part in slave mode and using a crystal  
oscillator to generate CLI, it can be very difficult to meet  
the tHDCLI specification because there is no phase control  
over the oscillator output. Special care must be taken to  
meet the critical tHDCLI specification when operating in this  
condition.  
ADDITIONAL RESTRICTIONS IN SLAVE MODE  
When operating in slave mode, note the following restrictions:  
The HD falling edge should be located in the same CLI  
clock cycle as the VD falling edge or later than the VD  
falling edge. The HD falling edge should not be located  
within one cycle prior to the VD falling edge.  
If possible, all start-up serial writes should be performed  
with VD and HD disabled. This prevents unknown  
behavior caused by partial updating of registers before all  
information is loaded. See the Power-Up Sequence for  
Master Mode section.  
VD  
tVDHD  
HD  
tHDCLI  
tCONV  
CLI  
tCLISHP  
tCLIDLY  
SHPLOC  
INTERNAL  
tSHPINH  
SHDLOC  
INTERNAL  
HD  
INTERNAL  
H-COUNTER  
RESET  
35.5 CYCLES  
H-COUNTER  
(PIXEL COUNTER)  
X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
0
X X X X X X X X X  
1
2
X
NOTES:  
1. EXTERNAL HD FALLING EDGE IS LATCHED BY CLI RISING EDGE, AND THEN LATCHED BY SHPLOC (INTERNAL SAMPLING EDGE).  
2. INTERNAL H-COUNTER IS ALWAYS RESET 35.5 CLOCK CYCLES AFTER THE INTERNAL HD FALLING EDGE AT SHDLOC (INTERNAL SAMPLING EDGE).  
3. DEPENDING ON THE VALUE OF SHPLOC, H-COUNTER RESET CAN OCCUR 36 OR 37 CLI CLOCK EDGES AFTER THE EXTERNAL HD FALLING EDGE.  
4. SHPLOC = 32, SHDLOC = 0 IS SHOWN. IN THIS CASE, THE H-COUNTER RESET OCCURS 36 CLI RISING EDGES AFTER HD FALLING EDGE.  
5. HD FALLING EDGE SHOULD OCCUR COINCIDENT WITH THE VD FALLING EDGE (WITHIN SAME CLI CYCLE) OR AFTER THE VD FALLING EDGE. HD FALLING  
EDGE SHOULD NOT OCCUR WITHIN ONE CYCLE IMMEDIATELY BEFORE THE VD FALLING EDGE.  
Figure 105. External VD/HD and Internal H-Counter Synchronization, Slave Mode  
0
60  
100 103  
112  
PIXEL NO.  
HD  
1
2
H1  
3
4
CLPOB  
MASTER MODE  
SLAVE MODE  
1
HBLKTOG1  
HBLKTOG2  
CLPOBTOG1  
CLPOBTOG2  
60  
(60 – 36) = 24  
(100 – 36) = 64  
(103 – 36) = 67  
(112 – 36) = 76  
2
3
4
100  
103  
112  
Figure 106. Example of Slave Mode Register Settings to Obtain Desired Toggle Positions  
Rev. B | Page 84 of 112  
 
 
AD9920A  
Figure 107 shows this restriction for slave mode. The last 36 pixels  
before the counters are reset cannot be used. In slave mode, the  
counter reset is delayed with respect to VD/HD placement, so  
the inhibited area is different than it is in master mode.  
VERTICAL TOGGLE POSITION PLACEMENT NEAR  
COUNTER RESET  
An additional consideration during the reset of the internal  
counters is the vertical toggle position placement. There is a  
region of 36 pixels prior to the internal counter reset in which  
no toggles can take place.  
It is recommended that Pixel Location 0 not be used for any of  
the toggle positions for the VSG and SUBCK pulses.  
VD  
HD  
H-COUNTER  
RESET  
NO TOGGLE POSITIONSALLOWED IN THIS AREA  
H-COUNTER  
(PIXEL COUNTER)  
X
X
X
X
X
X
N-35 N-34 N-33 N-32  
N-13 N-12 N-11 N-10 N-9 N-8 N-7 N-6 N-5 N-4 N-3 N-2 N-1  
N
0
1
2
NOTE:  
TOGGLE POSITIONS CANNOT BE PROGRAMMED WITHIN 36 PIXELS OF PIXEL 0 LOCATION.  
Figure 107. Toggle Position Inhibited Area, Slave Mode  
Rev. B | Page 85 of 112  
 
 
AD9920A  
When returning from Standby3 mode to normal operation, the  
timing core must be reset at least 500 μs after the STANDBY  
register is written to. This allows sufficient time for the crystal  
circuit to settle.  
STANDBY MODE OPERATION  
The AD9920A contains three standby modes to optimize the  
overall power dissipation in a particular application. Bits[1:0]  
of Address 0x00 control the power-down state of the device.  
The vertical outputs can also be programmed to hold a specific  
value during the Standby3 mode by using Address 0x26. This  
register is useful during power-up if different polarities are  
required by the V-driver and CCD to prevent damage when VH  
and VL areas are applied. The polarities for Standby1 mode and  
Standby2 mode are also programmable, using Address 0x25, and  
OUT_CONTROL = low uses the same polarities programmed  
for Standby1 and Standby2 modes in Address 0x25. The GPO  
polarities are programmable using Address 0x27.  
Table 48. Power States Set by Standby Register  
Standby Register,  
Bits[1:0]  
Description  
00  
01  
10  
11  
Normal operation (full power)  
Standby1 mode  
Standby2 mode  
Standby3 mode (lowest power)  
Table 49 and Table 50 summarize the operation of each power-  
down mode. The OUT_CONTROL register takes priority over  
the Standby1 and Standby2 modes in determining the digital  
output states, but Standby3 mode takes priority over OUT_  
CONTROL. Standby3 has the lowest power consumption and  
even shuts down the crystal oscillator circuit between CLI and  
CLO. Therefore, if CLI and CLO are being used with a crystal  
to generate the master clock, this circuit is powered down, and  
there is no clock signal.  
Note that the GPO outputs are high-Z by default at power-up  
until Address 0x7A is used to select them as outputs.  
CLI FREQUENCY CHANGE  
If the input clock CLI is interrupted or changed to a different  
frequency, the timing core must be reset for proper operation.  
After the CLI clock has settled to the new frequency, or the  
previous frequency is resumed, write 0 and then 1 to the  
RST  
TGCORE_  
register (Address 0x14). This guarantees  
that the timing core operates properly.  
Table 49. Standby Mode Operation for HCLKMODE = 0x1, 0x2, or 0x4  
(Standby Polarities for XV, XSUBCK, and GPO Outputs Are Programmable)  
I/O Block  
Standby3 (Default)1, 2  
OUT_CONTROL = Low2  
Standby23, 4  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Standby13, 4  
Only REFT, REFB on  
On  
On  
Running  
Low (4.3 mA)  
High (4.3 mA)  
Low (4.3 mA)  
High (4.3 mA)  
Low (4.3 mA)  
High (4.3 mA)  
Low (4.3 mA)  
High (4.3 mA)  
Low (4.3 mA)  
Low (4.3 mA)  
Running  
AFE  
Timing Core  
CLO Oscillator  
CLO  
H1  
H2  
H3  
H4  
H5  
H6  
H7  
H8  
HL  
RG  
VD  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Low  
No change  
No change  
No change  
No change  
Low  
High  
Low  
High  
Low  
High  
Low  
High  
Low  
Low  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
Low  
Low (4.3 mA)  
High (4.3 mA)  
Low (4.3 mA)  
High (4.3 mA)  
Low (4.3 mA)  
High (4.3 mA)  
Low (4.3 mA)  
High (4.3 mA)  
Low (4.3 mA)  
Low (4.3 mA)  
VDHDPOL value  
VDHDPOL value  
Low  
Low  
VDHDPOL value  
VDHDPOL value  
Running  
Low  
Low  
Low  
HD  
Low  
Running  
DCLK  
D0 to D11  
XV1 to XV24  
XSUBCK  
Low  
Low  
Low  
Low  
Running  
Low  
Low  
Low  
Low  
Low  
Low  
GPO1 to GPO4,  
Low  
Low  
Low  
Low  
GPO7, and GPO8  
1 To exit Standby3 or Standby2 mode, write 00 to the standby register (Address 0x00, Bits[1:0]) and then reset the timing core after 500 μs to guarantee proper settling of the  
oscillator and external crystal.  
2 Standby3 mode takes priority over OUT_CONTROL for determining the output polarities.  
3 These polarities assume OUT_CONTROL = high because OUT_CONTROL = low takes priority over Standby1 and Standby2.  
4 Standby1 and Standby2 set H and RG drive strength to minimum value (4.3 mA).  
Rev. B | Page 86 of 112  
 
 
 
AD9920A  
Table 50. Standby Mode Operation for HCLKMODE = 0x10  
(Standby Polarities for XV, XSUBCK, and GPO Outputs Are Programmable)  
I/O Block  
Standby3 (Default)1, 2  
OUT_CONTROL = Low2  
Standby23, 4  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Standby13, 4  
AFE  
Timing Core  
CLO Oscillator  
CLO  
H1  
H2  
H3  
H4  
H5  
H6  
H7  
H8  
HL  
RG  
VD  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Low  
No change  
No change  
No change  
No change  
Low  
Low  
Low  
Low  
Low  
Low  
Low  
Low  
Low  
Only REFT, REFB on  
On  
On  
Low  
Running  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
Low  
Low (4.3 mA)  
Low (4.3 mA)  
Low (4.3 mA)  
Low (4.3 mA)  
Low (4.3 mA)  
Low (4.3 mA)  
Low (4.3 mA)  
Low (4.3 mA)  
Low (4.3 mA)  
Low (4.3 mA)  
VDHDPOL value  
VDHDPOL value  
Low  
Low (4.3 mA)  
Low (4.3 mA)  
Low (4.3 mA)  
Low (4.3 mA)  
Low (4.3 mA)  
Low (4.3 mA)  
Low (4.3 mA)  
Low (4.3 mA)  
Low (4.3 mA)  
Low (4.3 mA)  
Running  
Low  
VDHDPOL value  
VDHDPOL value  
Running  
Low  
Low  
Low  
HD  
Low  
Running  
DCLK  
D0 to D11  
XV1 to XV24  
XSUBCK  
Low  
Low  
Low  
Low  
Running  
Low  
Low  
Low  
Low  
Low  
Low  
GPO1 to GPO4,  
Low  
Low  
Low  
Low  
GPO7, and GPO8  
1 To exit Standby3 or Standby2 mode, write 00 to the standby register (Address 0x00, Bits[1:0]) and then reset the timing core after 500 μs to guarantee proper settling of the  
oscillator and external crystal.  
2 Standby3 mode takes priority over OUT_CONTROL for determining the output polarities.  
3 These polarities assume OUT_CONTROL = high because OUT_CONTROL = low takes priority over Standby1 and Standby2.  
4 Standby1 and Standby2 set H and RG drive strength to minimum value (4.3 mA).  
Rev. B | Page 87 of 112  
 
 
AD9920A  
CIRCUIT LAYOUT INFORMATION  
The PCB layout is critical in achieving good image quality from  
the AD9920A. All of the supply pins, particularly the AVDD,  
TCVDD, RGVDD, and HVDD pins, must be decoupled to  
ground with good quality, high frequency chip capacitors. The  
decoupling capacitors should be located as close as possible to  
the supply pins and should have a very low impedance path to a  
continuous ground plane. If possible, there should be a 4.7 μF  
or larger value bypass capacitor for each main supply—AVDD,  
HVDD, and DRVDD—although this is not necessary for each  
individual pin. In most applications, the supply for RGVDD and  
HVDD is shared, which can be done as long as the individual  
supply pins are separately bypassed with 0.1 μF capacitors. A  
separate 3 V supply can also be used for DRVDD, but this supply  
pin should still be decoupled to the same ground plane as the  
rest of the chip. A separate ground for DRVSS is not recommended.  
Similarly, a CCD with H1, H2, H3, and H4 inputs should have  
the following:  
H1 and H3 connected to CCD H1  
H2 and H4 connected to CCD H2  
H5 and H7 connected to CCD H3  
H6 and H8 connected to CCD H4  
TYPICAL 3 V SYSTEM  
The AD9920A typical circuit connections for a 3 V system are  
shown in Figure 110 and Figure 112. This application uses an  
external 3.3 V supply, which is connected to the LDO input of  
the AD9920A. The LDO provides 1.8 V to the AVDD, TCVDD,  
and DVDD pins.  
EXTERNAL CRYSTAL APPLICATION  
The AD9920A contains an on-chip oscillator for driving an  
external crystal. Figure 108 shows an example application using  
a typical 27 MHz crystal. There is an internal feedback resistor  
(typical value ≈ 7 MΩ). However, in the event that the internal  
resistance is too high and prevents proper crystal operation, an  
external resistor can be added in parallel. The value of this  
external resistor is typically between 1 MΩ and 2 MΩ. For the  
exact value of this resistor and other necessary external resistors  
and capacitors, it is best to consult the crystal manufacturer.  
The analog bypass pins (REFT and REFB) should be carefully  
decoupled to ground as close as possible to their respective pins.  
The analog input (CCDIN) capacitor should be located close to  
the pin.  
The H1 to H8, HL, and RG traces should be designed to have  
low inductance to minimize distortion of the signals. The com-  
plementary signals, H1/H3/H5/H7 and H2/H4/H6/H8, should  
be routed as close together and as symmetrically as possible to  
minimize mutual inductance. Heavier PCB traces are recom-  
mended because of the large transient current demand on H1  
to H8 by the CCD. If possible, physically locating the AD9920A  
closer to the CCD reduces the inductance on these lines. The  
routing path should be as direct as possible from the AD9920A  
to the CCD.  
Note that a 2× crystal is not recommended for use with the  
CLO oscillator circuit. The crystal frequency should not exceed  
40.5 MHz.  
~7MΩ  
AD9920A  
Note that it is recommended that all H1 to H8 outputs on the  
AD9920A be used together for maximum flexibility in drive  
strength settings. A typical CCD with H1 and H2 inputs should  
have only the AD9920A H1, H3, H5, and H7 outputs connected  
together to drive CCD H1, and only the AD9920A H2, H4, H6,  
and H8 outputs connected together to drive CCD H2.  
~375Ω  
J5  
K5  
CLI  
CLO  
USER DEFINED  
XTAL  
5pF TO 20pF  
5pF TO 20pF  
Figure 108. Crystal Application Using CLI/CLO  
Rev. B | Page 88 of 112  
 
 
AD9920A  
CIRCUIT CONFIGURATIONS  
3
6
SERIAL INTERFACE  
GENERAL-PURPOSE OUTPUTS  
NOTE: ONE GPO IS NEEDED TO DRIVE VDR_EN (PIN B11)  
(FROM ASIC/DSP)  
OPTIONAL CLOCK OSCILLATOR OUTPUT  
(FOR CRYSTAL APPLICATION)  
HORIZONTAL SYNC IN/OUT  
VERTICAL SYNC IN/OUT  
MASTER CLOCK INPUT (3V LOGIC)  
0.1µF  
EXTERNAL RESET IN  
(TIE TO IOVDD IF RESET IS NOT USED)  
DCLK OUTPUT  
0.1µF  
12  
0.1µF  
DATA OUTPUTS  
ANALOG OUTPUT FROM CCD  
RG TO CCD  
HL TO CCD  
H7, H8 TO CCD  
H6  
H5  
H4  
H3  
H2  
H1  
H2  
H1  
D8  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
H5, H6 TO CCD  
A5  
A6  
B6  
B7  
A7  
A8  
C7  
C6  
B9  
B11  
F2  
F1  
H3, H4 TO CCD  
H1, H2 TO CCD  
D2  
D1  
DVSS  
TCVSS  
RGVSS  
HVSS1  
HVSS2  
HVSS2  
IOVSS  
DRVSS/LDOVSS  
VDVSS  
D2  
D1  
A9  
K4  
K3  
E2  
G2  
J2  
(LSB) D0  
VDR_EN  
GPO OUTPUT  
GPO OUTPUT  
(OR GND, IF NOT USED)  
SRSW  
SRCTL  
G11  
B2  
C10  
C9  
C2  
J6  
ANALOG CONTROL INPUT  
(OR GND, IF NOT USED)  
LEGEN  
AD9920A  
NOT DRAWN TO SCALE  
CLIVDD  
LDOIN  
CCDGND  
+3V CLI SUPPLY  
L5  
B1  
C1  
K7  
LDOOUT  
DRVDD  
IOVDD  
AVSS  
AVSS  
A2  
+3V SUPPLY  
J7  
0.1µF  
K8  
H11  
0.1µF  
NC  
NC  
NC  
A1  
DVDD  
TCVDD  
AVDD  
0.1µF  
+1.8V SUPPLY  
A10  
K6  
L6  
A11  
L1  
L11  
B8  
0.1µF  
0.1µF  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
B10  
RGVDD  
HVDD1  
HVDD2  
L3  
E1  
G1  
J1  
J10  
+3V H, RG SUPPLY  
0.1µF  
0.1µF  
4.7µF  
6.3V  
HVDD2  
VH SUPPLY  
VL SUPPLY  
+3V SUPPLY  
1.0µF  
25V  
0.1µF  
25V  
4.7µF  
10V  
0.1µF  
10V  
0.1uF  
18  
VERTICAL OUTPUT (TO CCD)  
SUBCK OUTPUT (TO CCD)  
XSUBCNT INPUT (FROM GPO OR TIE TO +3V)  
Figure 109. Typical 1.8 V Circuit Configuration in Legacy Mode (18-Channel Mode)  
Rev. B | Page 89 of 112  
 
AD9920A  
3
6
SERIAL INTERFACE  
(FROM ASIC/DSP)  
GENERAL-PURPOSE OUTPUTS  
NOTE: ONE GPO IS NEEDED TO DRIVE VDR_EN (PIN B11)  
OPTIONAL CLOCK OSCILLATOR OUTPUT  
(FOR CRYSTAL APPLICATION)  
HORIZONTAL SYNC IN/OUT  
VERTICAL SYNC IN/OUT  
MASTER CLOCK INPUT (3V LOGIC)  
EXTERNAL RESET IN  
(TIE TO IOVDD IF RESET IS NOT USED)  
DCLK OUTPUT  
0.1µF  
0.1µF  
12  
DATA OUTPUTS  
0.1µF  
ANALOG OUTPUT FROM CCD  
RG TO CCD  
HL TO CCD  
H7, H8 TO CCD  
H6  
H5  
H4  
H3  
H2  
H1  
H2  
H1  
D8  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
H5, H6 TO CCD  
H3, H4 TO CCD  
H1, H2 TO CCD  
A5  
A6  
B6  
B7  
A7  
A8  
C7  
C6  
B9  
B11  
F2  
F1  
D2  
D1  
DVSS  
TCVSS  
RGVSS  
HVSS1  
HVSS2  
HVSS2  
IOVSS  
DRVSS/LDOVSS  
VDVSS  
D2  
D1  
A9  
K4  
K3  
E2  
G2  
J2  
(LSB) D0  
VDR_EN  
GPO OUTPUT  
GPO OUTPUT  
(OR GND, IF NOT USED)  
SRSW  
SRCTL  
G11  
B2  
C10  
C9  
C2  
J6  
ANALOG CONTROL INPUT  
(OR GND, IF NOT USED)  
LEGEN  
AD9920A  
NOT DRAWN TO SCALE  
CLIVDD  
LDOIN  
CCDGND  
+3V CLI SUPPLY  
+3V LDO INPUT  
L5  
B1  
C1  
K7  
LDOOUT  
+1.8V LDO OUT TO  
AVDD, TCVDD, DVDD  
0.1µF  
0.1µF  
DRVDD  
IOVDD  
AVSS  
AVSS  
A2  
J7  
+3V SUPPLY  
0.1µF  
K8  
H11  
0.1µF  
NC  
NC  
NC  
A1  
DVDD  
TCVDD  
AVDD  
+1.8V LDO OUT  
A10  
K6  
L6  
A11  
L1  
L11  
B8  
0.1µF  
0.1µF  
NC  
NC  
0.1µF  
NC  
NC  
B10  
RGVDD  
HVDD1  
HVDD2  
HVDD2  
L3  
E1  
G1  
J1  
J10  
+3V H, RG SUPPLY  
0.1µF  
0.1µF  
4.7µF  
6.3V  
VH SUPPLY  
VL SUPPLY  
+3V SUPPLY  
0.1µF  
25V  
1.0µF  
25V  
0.1µF  
10V  
4.7µF  
10V  
0.1uF  
18  
VERTICAL OUTPUT (TO CCD)  
SUBCK OUTPUT (TO CCD)  
XSUBCNT INPUT (FROM GPO OR TIE TO +3V)  
Figure 110. Typical 3 V Circuit Configuration in Legacy Mode (18-Channel Mode)  
Rev. B | Page 90 of 112  
 
AD9920A  
3
6
SERIAL INTERFACE  
(FROM ASIC/DSP)  
GENERAL-PURPOSE OUTPUTS  
NOTE: ONE GPO IS NEEDED TO DRIVE VDR_EN (PIN B11)  
OPTIONAL CLOCK OSCILLATOR OUTPUT  
(FOR CRYSTAL APPLICATION)  
HORIZONTAL SYNC IN/OUT  
VERTICAL SYNC IN/OUT  
MASTER CLOCK INPUT (3V LOGIC)  
0.1µF  
EXTERNAL RESET IN  
(TIE TO IOVDD IF RESET IS NOT USED)  
DCLK OUTPUT  
0.1µF  
12  
0.1µF  
DATA OUTPUTS  
ANALOG OUTPUT FROM CCD  
RG TO CCD  
HL TO CCD  
H7, H8 TO CCD  
H6  
H5  
H4  
H3  
H2  
H1  
H2  
H1  
D8  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
H5, H6 TO CCD  
A5  
A6  
B6  
B7  
A7  
A8  
C7  
C6  
B9  
B11  
F2  
F1  
H3, H4 TO CCD  
H1, H2 TO CCD  
D2  
D1  
DVSS  
TCVSS  
RGVSS  
HVSS1  
HVSS2  
HVSS2  
IOVSS  
DRVSS/LDOVSS  
VDVSS  
D2  
D1  
A9  
K4  
K3  
E2  
G2  
J2  
(LSB) D0  
VDR_EN  
GPO OUTPUT  
GPO OUTPUT  
(OR GND, IF NOT USED)  
SRSW  
SRCTL  
G11  
B2  
C10  
C9  
C2  
J6  
ANALOG CONTROL INPUT  
(OR GND, IF NOT USED)  
LEGEN  
+3V  
AD9920A  
NOT DRAWN TO SCALE  
CLIVDD  
LDOIN  
CCDGND  
+3V CLI SUPPLY  
L5  
B1  
C1  
K7  
LDOOUT  
DRVDD  
IOVDD  
AVSS  
AVSS  
A2  
+3V SUPPLY  
J7  
0.1µF  
K8  
H11  
0.1µF  
NC  
NC  
NC  
A1  
DVDD  
TCVDD  
AVDD  
0.1µF  
+1.8V SUPPLY  
A10  
K6  
L6  
A11  
L1  
L11  
B8  
0.1µF  
0.1µF  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
B10  
RGVDD  
HVDD1  
HVDD2  
HVDD2  
L3  
E1  
G1  
J1  
J10  
+3V H, RG SUPPLY  
0.1µF  
0.1µF  
4.7µF  
6.3V  
VH SUPPLY  
VL SUPPLY  
+3V SUPPLY  
0.1µF  
25V  
1.0µF  
25V  
0.1µF  
10V  
4.7µF  
10V  
0.1uF  
19  
VERTICAL OUTPUT (TO CCD)  
SUBCK OUTPUT (TO CCD)  
XSUBCNT INPUT (FROM GPO OR TIE TO +3V)  
Figure 111. Typical 1.8 V Circuit Configuration in 19-Channel Mode  
Rev. B | Page 91 of 112  
AD9920A  
3
6
SERIAL INTERFACE  
(FROM ASIC/DSP)  
GENERAL-PURPOSE OUTPUTS  
NOTE: ONE GPO IS NEEDED TO DRIVE VDR_EN (PIN B11)  
OPTIONAL CLOCK OSCILLATOR OUTPUT  
(FOR CRYSTAL APPLICATION)  
HORIZONTAL SYNC IN/OUT  
VERTICAL SYNC IN/OUT  
MASTER CLOCK INPUT (3V LOGIC)  
EXTERNAL RESET IN  
(TIE TO IOVDD IF RESET IS NOT USED)  
DCLK OUTPUT  
0.1µF  
0.1µF  
12  
0.1µF  
DATA OUTPUTS  
ANALOG OUTPUT FROM CCD  
RG TO CCD  
HL TO CCD  
H7, H8 TO CCD  
H6  
H5  
H4  
H3  
H2  
H1  
H2  
H1  
D8  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
H5, H6 TO CCD  
H3, H4 TO CCD  
H1, H2 TO CCD  
A5  
A6  
B6  
B7  
A7  
A8  
C7  
C6  
B9  
B11  
F2  
F1  
D2  
D1  
DVSS  
TCVSS  
RGVSS  
HVSS1  
HVSS2  
HVSS2  
IOVSS  
DRVSS/LDOVSS  
VDVSS  
D2  
D1  
A9  
K4  
K3  
E2  
G2  
J2  
(LSB) D0  
VDR_EN  
GPO OUTPUT  
GPO OUTPUT  
(OR GND, IF NOT USED)  
SRSW  
SRCTL  
G11  
B2  
C10  
C9  
C2  
J6  
ANALOG CONTROL INPUT  
(OR GND, IF NOT USED)  
LEGEN  
+3V  
AD9920A  
NOT DRAWN TO SCALE  
CLIVDD  
LDOIN  
CCDGND  
+3V CLI SUPPLY  
+3V LDO INPUT  
L5  
B1  
C1  
K7  
LDOOUT  
+1.8V LDO OUT TO  
AVDD, TCVDD, DVDD  
0.1µF  
0.1µF  
0.1µF  
DRVDD  
IOVDD  
AVSS  
AVSS  
A2  
J7  
+3V SUPPLY  
0.1µF  
K8  
H11  
0.1µF  
NC  
NC  
NC  
A1  
DVDD  
TCVDD  
AVDD  
+1.8V LDO OUT  
A10  
K6  
L6  
A11  
L1  
L11  
B8  
0.1µF  
NC  
NC  
0.1µF  
NC  
NC  
B10  
RGVDD  
HVDD1  
HVDD2  
HVDD2  
L3  
E1  
G1  
J1  
J10  
+3V H, RG SUPPLY  
4.7µF  
6.3V  
0.1µF 0.1µF  
VH SUPPLY  
VL SUPPLY  
+3V SUPPLY  
0.1µF  
1.0µF  
25V  
25V  
0.1µF  
10V  
4.7µF  
10V  
0.1uF  
19  
VERTICAL OUTPUT (TO CCD)  
SUBCK OUTPUT (TO CCD)  
XSUBCNT INPUT (FROM GPO OR TIE TO +3V)  
Figure 112. Typical 3 V Circuit Configuration in 19-Channel Mode  
Rev. B | Page 92 of 112  
 
AD9920A  
SERIAL INTERFACE  
Figure 114 shows a more efficient way to write to the registers,  
using the AD9920A address auto-increment capability. Using  
this method, the lowest desired address is written first, followed  
by multiple 28-bit data-words. Each new 28-bit data-word is  
automatically written to the next highest register address. By  
eliminating the need to write each 12-bit address, faster register  
loading is achieved. Continuous write operations can be used  
starting with any register location.  
SERIAL INTERFACE TIMING  
The internal registers of the AD9920A are accessed through a  
3-wire serial interface. Each register consists of a 12-bit address  
and a 28-bit data-word. Both the 12-bit address and 28-bit data-  
word are written starting with the LSB. To write to each register,  
a 40-bit operation is required, as shown in Figure 113. Although  
many registers are fewer than 28 bits wide, all 28 bits must be  
written for each register. For example, if the register is only 20 bits  
wide, the upper eight bits are don’t care bits and must be filled  
with 0s during the serial write operation. If fewer than 28 data  
bits are written, the register is not updated with new data.  
12-BIT ADDRESS  
28-BIT DATA  
SDATA  
SCK  
A0  
A1  
A2  
A3  
A4  
A5  
tDS  
A6  
A8  
A9 A10 A11 D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D25 D26 D27  
A7  
tDH  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
38  
39  
40  
tLS  
tLH  
SL  
NOTES  
1. SDATA BITS ARE LATCHED ON SCK RISING EDGES. SCK CAN IDLE HIGH OR LOW BETWEEN WRITE OPERATIONS.  
2. ALL 40 BITS MUST BE WRITTEN: 12 BITS FOR ADDRESS AND 28 BITS FOR DATA.  
3. IF THE REGISTER LENGTH IS <28 BITS, 0s MUST BE USED TO COMPLETE THE 28-BIT DATA LENGTH.  
4. NEW DATA VALUES ARE UPDATED IN THE SPECIFIED REGISTER LOCATION AT DIFFERENT TIMES, DEPENDING ON THE  
PARTICULAR REGISTER WRITTEN TO. SEE THE UPDATING NEW REGISTER VALUES SECTION FOR MORE INFORMATION.  
Figure 113. Serial Write Operation  
DATA FOR STARTING  
REGISTER ADDRESS  
DATA FOR NEXT  
REGISTER ADDRESS  
SDATA  
A0  
A1  
A2  
A10 A11 D0  
D1  
D26 D27 D0  
D1  
D26 D27 D0  
A3  
D1  
D2  
SCK  
SL  
70  
71  
1
2
3
4
11  
12  
13  
14  
39  
40  
41  
42  
67  
68  
69  
NOTES  
1. MULTIPLE SEQUENTIAL REGISTERS CAN BE LOADED CONTINUOUSLY.  
2. THE FIRST (LOWEST) REGISTER ADDRESS IS WRITTEN, FOLLOWED BY MULTIPLE 28-BIT DATA-WORDS.  
3. THE ADDRESS AUTOMATICALLY INCREMENTS WITH EACH 28-BIT DATA-WORD (ALL 28 BITS MUST BE WRITTEN).  
4. SL IS HELD LOW UNTIL THE LAST DESIRED REGISTER HAS BEEN LOADED.  
Figure 114. Continuous Serial Write Operation  
Rev. B | Page 93 of 112  
 
 
 
AD9920A  
Each V-sequence occupies 40 register addresses, and each field  
occupies 16 register addresses.  
LAYOUT OF INTERNAL REGISTERS  
The AD9920A address space is divided into two register areas, as  
illustrated in Figure 115. In the first address space, Address 0x00 to  
Address 0xFF contain the registers for the AFE, miscellaneous,  
VD/HD, I/O and CP, timing core, shutter and GPO, and update  
control functions. The second address space, beginning at  
Address 0x400, consists of the V-pattern groups, V-sequences,  
and field registers. This set of registers is configurable; the user  
can decide how many V-pattern groups, V-sequences, and fields  
are used in a particular design. Therefore, the addresses for  
these registers vary, depending on the number of V-patterns  
and V-sequences chosen.  
The starting address for the V-sequences is equal to 0x400 plus  
the number of V-pattern groups multiplied by 48. The starting  
address for the fields is equal to the starting address of the  
V-sequences plus the number of V-sequences multiplied by 40.  
The V-pattern, V-sequence, and field registers must always  
occupy a continuous block of addresses.  
Figure 116 shows an example in which three V-pattern groups,  
four V-sequences, and two fields are used. The starting address  
for the V-pattern groups is always 0x400. Because VPATNUM = 3,  
the V-pattern groups occupy 144 address locations. The start of  
the V-sequence registers is 0x490 (that is, 0x400 + 144). With  
SEQNUM = 4, the V-sequences occupy 160 address locations.  
Therefore, the field registers begin at 0x530 (that is, 0x490 + 160).  
Address 0x28 specifies the total number of V-pattern groups  
and V-sequences used. The starting address for the V-pattern  
groups is always 0x400. The starting address for the V-sequences  
is based on the number of V-pattern groups used, with each  
V-pattern group occupying 48 register addresses. The starting  
address for the field registers depends on both the number of  
V-pattern groups and the number of V-sequences.  
The AD9920A address space contains many unused addresses.  
Undefined addresses between Address 0x00 and Address 0xFF  
should not be written to; otherwise, the AD9920A may operate  
incorrectly. Continuous register writes should be performed  
carefully so that undefined registers are not written to.  
FIXED REGISTER AREA  
ADDR 0x00  
CONFIGURABLE REGISTER AREA  
VPAT START 0x400  
AFE REGISTERS  
MISCELLANEOUS REGISTERS  
V-PATTERN GROUPS  
VD/HD REGISTERS  
I/O, STBY POL REGISTERS  
VSEQ START  
FIELD START  
MAX 0xFFF  
MEMORY, MODE REGISTERS  
TIMING CORE REGISTERS  
V-SEQUENCES  
TEST REGISTERS  
SHUTTER AND GPO REGISTERS  
UPDATE CONTROL REGISTERS  
EXTRA REGISTERS  
FIELDS  
INVALID DO NOT ACCESS  
ADDR 0xFF  
Figure 115. Layout of AD9920A Registers  
ADDR 0x400  
3 V-PATTERN GROUPS  
(48 × 3 = 144 REGISTERS)  
ADDR 0x490  
ADDR 0x530  
4 V-SEQUENCES  
(40 × 4 = 160 REGISTERS)  
2 FIELDS  
(16 × 2 = 32 REGISTERS)  
ADDR 0x550  
MAX 0xFFF  
UNUSED MEMORY  
Figure 116. Example Register Configuration  
Rev. B | Page 94 of 112  
 
 
 
AD9920A  
delays the VD-updated register updates to any HD line in the  
field. Note that the field registers are not affected by the update  
register.  
UPDATING NEW REGISTER VALUES  
The AD9920A internal registers are updated at different times,  
depending on the particular register. Table 51 summarizes the  
four register update types: SCK, VD, SG line, and SCP. Tables in  
the Complete Register Listing section contain an update type  
column that identifies when each register is updated.  
SG Line-Updated Registers  
A few of the shutter registers are updated at the HD falling edge  
at the start of the SG active line. These registers control the  
SUBCK signal so that the SUBCK output is not updated until  
the SG line occurs.  
Table 51. Register Update Locations  
Update Type Description  
SCP-Updated Registers  
SCK  
When the 28th data bit (D27) is clocked in, the  
register is immediately updated.  
At the next SCP where they are used, the V-pattern group and  
V-sequence registers are updated. For example, in Figure 117  
this field has selected Region 1 to use VSEQ3 for the vertical  
outputs. This means that a write to any of the VSEQ3 registers  
or to any of the V-pattern group registers that are referenced by  
VSEQ3, updates at SCP1. If multiple writes are done to the same  
register, the last one done before SCP1 is the one that is updated.  
Likewise, register writes to any VSEQ5 registers are updated at  
SCP2, and register writes to any VSEQ8 registers are updated  
at SCP3.  
VD  
Register is updated at the next VD falling edge.  
VD-updated registers can be delayed further by  
using the update register at Address 0x17. Field  
registers are not affected by the update register.  
Register is updated at the HD falling edge at the  
start of the SG active line.  
SG Line  
SCP  
Register is updated at the next SCP when the  
register is used.  
SCK-Updated Registers  
As soon as the 28th data bit (D27) is clocked in, some registers  
are immediately updated. These registers are used for functions  
that do not require gating with the next VD boundary, such as  
power-up and reset functions.  
Caution  
It is recommended that the registers in the configurable address  
area not be written within 36 pixels of any HD falling edge where  
a sequence change position (SCP) occurs. See Figure 107 for an  
example of what this inhibit area looks like in master and slave  
modes. This restriction applies to the V-pattern, V-sequence,  
and field registers. As shown in Figure 117, writing to these  
registers before the VD falling edge typically avoids loading  
these registers during SCP locations.  
VD-Updated Registers  
More registers are updated at the next VD falling edge. By  
updating these values at the next VD edge, the current field is  
not corrupted, and the new register values are applied to the  
next field. The VD update can be further delayed past the VD  
falling edge by using the update register (Address 0x17). This  
SCK  
VD  
SG  
UPDATED  
SCP  
UPDATED  
UPDATED UPDATED  
SERIAL  
WRITE  
VD  
HD  
SGLINE  
VSG  
USE VSEQ2  
USE VSEQ3  
REGION 1  
USE VSEQ5  
REGION 2  
USE VSEQ8  
REGION 3  
XV1 TO XV24  
REGION 0  
SCP0  
SCP0  
SCP1  
SCP2  
SCP3  
Figure 117. Register Update Locations (See Table 51 for Definitions)  
Rev. B | Page 95 of 112  
 
 
 
 
AD9920A  
COMPLETE REGISTER LISTING  
When an address contains fewer than 28 data bits, all remaining bits must be written as 0s.  
Table 52. AFE Registers  
Default  
Update  
Type  
Data  
Bits  
Default  
Value  
Address  
Name  
Description  
0x00  
[1:0]  
0x03  
SCK  
STANDBY  
Standby modes.  
0 = normal operation (full power).  
1 = Standby1 mode.  
2 = Standby2 mode.  
3 = Standby3 mode (lowest power).  
0 = disable OB clamp.  
1 = enable OB clamp.  
[2]  
[3]  
[4]  
[5]  
[6]  
[0]  
[1]  
0x01  
CLPENABLE  
CLPSPEED  
FASTUPDATE  
PBLK_LVL  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 = select normal OB clamp settling.  
1 = select fast OB clamp settling.  
0 = ignore CDS gain.  
1 = very fast clamping when CDS gain is updated.  
0 = blank data outputs to 0 during PBLK.  
1 = blank data outputs to programmed clamp level during PBLK.  
0 = enable input dc restore circuit during PBLK.  
1 = disable input dc restore circuit during PBLK.  
DCBYP  
0x01  
SCK  
DOUTDISABLE  
DOUTLATCH  
0 = data outputs are driven.  
1 = data outputs are three-stated.  
0 = latch data outputs using DOUTPHASE register setting.  
1 = output latch is transparent.  
1 = enable gray coding of digital data output.  
Set to 0.  
[2]  
[3]  
0
0
GRAYEN  
Test  
0x02  
0x03  
0x04  
[0]  
0
VD  
VD  
VD  
Test  
Do not access, or set to 0.  
[23:0]  
[2:0]  
0xFFFFFF  
0
Test  
Do not access, or set to 0xFFFFFF.  
CDSGAIN  
CDS gain setting.  
0 = −3 dB.  
4 = 0 dB.  
6 = +3 dB.  
7 = +6 dB.  
All other values are invalid.  
0x05  
0x06  
0x07  
0x08  
0x09  
0x0A  
0x0B  
0x0C  
0x0D  
[9:0]  
0x0F  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
SCK  
SCK  
VD  
VGAGAIN  
CLAMPLEVEL  
Test  
VGA gain. 6 dB to 42 dB (0.035 dB per step).  
Optical black clamp level. 0 LSB to 255 LSB (0.25 LSB per step).  
Do not access, or set to 0.  
[9:0]  
0x1EC  
[27:0]  
[27:0]  
[27:0]  
[27:0]  
[27:0]  
[27:0]  
[0]  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Test  
Do not access, or set to 0.  
Test  
Do not access, or set to 0.  
Test  
Do not access, or set to 0.  
UNUSED  
Test  
Do not access, or set to 0.  
Do not access, or set to 0.  
CLIDIVIDE  
0 = do not divide CLI frequency.  
1 = divide CLI frequency by 2.  
Do not access, or set to 0.  
[7:1]  
[7:0]  
[8]  
0
0
0
0
Test  
0x0E  
0x0F  
SCK  
VD  
Test  
VDHD_IE  
Test  
Set to 0.  
VD/HD input enable. Set to 1 to enable VD/HD inputs for slave mode.  
Set to 0.  
[27:0]  
Rev. B | Page 96 of 112  
 
 
AD9920A  
Table 53. Miscellaneous Registers  
Default  
Data  
Bits  
Default  
Value  
Update  
Type  
Address  
Name  
Description  
0x10  
[0]  
[0]  
[0]  
0
SCK  
VD  
SW_RST  
Software reset. Bit self-clears to 0 when a reset occurs.  
1 = reset Address 0x00 to Address 0xFF back to default values.  
0x11  
0x12  
0
OUT_CONTROL  
RST_SYNC_EN  
0 = make all outputs dc inactive.  
1 = enable outputs at next VD edge.  
0x01  
SCK  
0 = configure SYNC/RST as SYNC pin.  
1 = configure SYNC/RST as RST pin (default configuration is RST).  
Test mode only. Must be set to 0.  
[4:1]  
[0]  
0
Test  
0x13  
0x01  
SCK  
SYNCENABLE  
SYNCPOL  
SYNCSUSPEND  
1 = external synchronization enable. Configure SYNC/RST pin as an input.  
[1]  
[2]  
0
0
SYNC active polarity.  
Suspend clocks during SYNC active pulse.  
0 = don’t suspend.  
1 = suspend.  
[3]  
[4]  
[5]  
[6]  
0
0
0x01  
0x01  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ENH_SYNC_EN  
SYNC_MASK_HD  
SYNC_MASK_VD  
SYNC_MASK_V  
Test  
1 = enable enhanced sync/shutter operations.  
1 = mask HD during SYNCSUSPEND.  
1 = mask VD during SYNCSUSPEND.  
1 = mask XV outputs during SYNCSUSPEND.  
Test mode only. Must be set to 0.  
Test mode only. Must be set to 0.  
Test mode only. Must be set to 0.  
1 = enable SYNC to use only one edge to reset.  
[7]  
[12:8]  
[13]  
[14]  
[15]  
[16]  
[17]  
Test  
Test  
SYNC_EDGE_EN  
SYNC_RST_SHUTEN 1 = enable reset of the shutter control after SYNC operation occurs.  
GPO_RST_SYNC  
SYNC_CNT_INC  
1 = reset shutter and GPO control at SYNC operation.  
1 = increment field counter by 1 when SYNC occurs.  
0 = reset to 0.  
[19:18]  
[23:20]  
[24]  
0
0
0
0
0
UNUSED  
Test  
SWSYNC  
REG_RST_SHUT  
TGCORE_RST  
Set unused bits to 0.  
Test mode only. Must be set to 0.  
1 = initiate software SYNC event (self-clears to 0 after SYNC).  
1 = force shutter control to reset until REG_RST_SHUT = 0.  
[25]  
0x14  
0x15  
[0]  
SCK  
SCK  
Timing core reset bar.  
0 = reset TG core.  
1 = resume operation.  
[0]  
0
OSC_RST  
CLO oscillator reset bar.  
0 = oscillator in power-down state.  
1 = resume oscillator operation.  
0x16  
0x17  
[27:0]  
[12:0]  
0x01  
0
SCK  
SCK  
Test  
Test mode only. Must be set to 1.  
Update  
Serial update line. Sets the line (HD) within the field to update the  
VD-updated registers.  
[13]  
0
PREVENTUP  
Prevents the update of the VD-updated registers.  
0 = normal update.  
1 = prevent update of VD-updated registers.  
0x18  
0x19  
0x1A  
0x1B  
0x1C  
0x1D  
[27:0]  
[27:0]  
[27:0]  
[27:0]  
[23:0]  
[23:0]  
[24]  
0
SCK  
SCK  
SCK  
SCK  
SCK  
SCK  
Test  
Test mode only. Set to 0.  
0
Test  
Test mode only. Set to 0.  
0
Test  
Test mode only. Set to 0.  
0x0A  
Test  
Test mode only. Set to 0x0A.  
1 = each bit selects XV pulses for use as VSG pulses.  
0
0
0
VSGSELECT  
VSGMASK_CTL  
VSGMASK_CTL_EN  
VSG masking. Overrides settings in field registers when enabled.  
0 = disable VSGMASK_CTL bits. VSG masking is controlled by field registers.  
1 = enable VSGMASK_CTL bits to control VSG masking.  
0x1E  
0x1F  
[27]  
[0]  
[1]  
0
SCK  
SCK  
UNUSED  
Do not access, or set to 0.  
0x01  
0x01  
HCNT14_EN  
PBLK_MASK_EN  
1 = enable 14-bit H-counter.  
1 = disable clamp operation if PBLK is active at the same time as CLPOB.  
Rev. B | Page 97 of 112  
AD9920A  
Table 54. VD/HD Registers  
Default  
Update Type  
Address  
0x20  
Data Bits  
[0]  
Default Value  
Name  
Description  
0
0
0
0
SCK  
VD  
MASTER  
VDHDPOL  
HDRISE  
VDRISE  
VD/HD master or slave mode. 0 = slave mode, 1 = master mode.  
VD/HD active polarity. 0 = low, 1 = high.  
Rising edge location for HD. Minimum value is 36 pixels.  
Rising edge location for VD.  
0x21  
[0]  
0x22  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
VD  
Table 55. I/O Registers  
Default  
Default Update  
Data  
Bits  
Address  
Value  
Type  
Name  
Description  
0x23  
[0]  
[1]  
[2]  
[3]  
0
SCK  
OSC_NVR  
Oscillator normal voltage range. Set to match CLIVDD supply voltage.  
0 = 1.8 V.  
1 = 3.3 V.  
XV output normal voltage range. Set to match VDVDD supply voltage.  
0 = 1.8 V.  
1 = 3.3 V.  
I/O normal voltage range. Set to match IOVDD supply voltage.  
0 = 1.8 V.  
1 = 3.3 V.  
0
0
0
XV_NVR  
IO_NVR  
DATA_NVR  
Data pin normal voltage range. Set to match DRVDD supply voltage.  
0 = 1.8 V I/O.  
1 = 3.3 V I/O.  
[4]  
[5]  
[6]  
0
0
0
Test  
Test  
Test  
Test use only. Set to 0.  
Test use only. Set to 0.  
Test use only. Set to 0.  
0x24  
0x25  
[4:0]  
0x01  
SCK  
SCK  
HCLKMODE  
Selects HCLK output configuration. Should be written to desired value.  
Note that all other settings are invalid.  
0x01 = Mode 1.  
0x02 = Mode 2.  
0x04 = Mode 3.  
0x10 = 3-phase HCLK mode.  
Test use only. Set to 0.  
[5]  
0
0
Test  
[24:0]  
VT_STBY12  
Bits[23:0]: Standby1 and Standby2 polarity for XV[23:0].  
Bit 24: Standby1 and Standby2 polarity for XSUBCK.  
Settings also apply when OUT_CONTROL = low.  
0x26  
0x27  
[24:0]  
[7:0]  
0
0
0
SCK  
SCK  
VT_STBY3  
Bits[23:0]: Standby3 polarity for XV[23:0].  
Bit 24: Standby3 polarity for XSUBCK.  
GP_STDBY12  
GP_STDBY3  
Standby1 and Standby2 polarity for GPO outputs.  
Settings also apply when OUT_CONTROL = low.  
Standby3 polarity for GPO outputs.  
[15:8]  
Table 56. Memory Configuration and Mode Registers  
Address  
Data Bits  
Default Value  
Update Type  
Name  
Description  
0x28  
[4:0]  
[9:5]  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SCK  
VPATNUM  
SEQNUM  
UNUSED  
Mode  
Total number of V-pattern groups.  
Total number of V-sequences.  
0x29  
0x2A  
0x2B  
[27]  
SCK  
SCK  
SCK  
Do not access, or set to 0.  
[2:0]  
Total number of fields in the mode register.  
Selected first field in the mode register.  
Selected second field in the mode register.  
Selected third field in the mode register.  
Selected fourth field in the mode register.  
Selected fifth field in the mode register.  
[4:0]  
[9:5]  
[14:10]  
[19:15]  
[24:20]  
FIELD1  
FIELD2  
FIELD3  
FIELD4  
FIELD5  
Rev. B | Page 98 of 112  
AD9920A  
Address  
Data Bits  
[4:0]  
[9:5]  
Default Value  
Update Type  
Name  
Description  
0x2C  
0
0
0
0
0
SCK  
FIELD6  
FIELD7  
Selected sixth field in the mode register.  
Selected seventh field in the mode register.  
Do not access, or set to 0.  
0x2D  
0x2E  
0x2F  
[27]  
SCK  
SCK  
SCK  
UNUSED  
UNUSED  
UNUSED  
[27]  
Do not access, or set to 0.  
[27]  
Do not access, or set to 0.  
Table 57. Timing Core Registers  
Default  
Value  
Update  
Type  
Address  
Data Bits  
Name  
Description  
0x30  
[5:0]  
0
SCK  
H1POSLOC  
H1 rising edge location in HCLK Mode 1, Mode 2, and Mode 3.  
Phase 3 (H7/H8) rising edge location in 3-phase mode.  
H1 falling edge location in HCLK Mode 1, Mode 2, and Mode 3.  
Phase 3 (H7/H8) falling edge location in 3-phase mode.  
Test use only. Set to 1.  
[13:8]  
0x20  
H1NEGLOC  
[16]  
0x01  
0
Test  
0x31  
[5:0]  
SCK  
H2POSLOC  
H2 rising edge location in HCLK Mode 2.  
H5 rising edge location in HCLK Mode 3.  
Phase 2 (H5/H6) rising edge location in 3-phase mode.  
H2 falling edge location in HCLK Mode 2.  
H5 falling edge location in HCLK Mode 3.  
Phase 2 (H5/H6) falling edge location in 3-phase mode.  
Test use only. Set to 1.  
[13:8]  
0x20  
H2NEGLOC  
[16]  
0x01  
0
0x20  
0x01  
0
0x20  
0x01  
0
0x10  
0x01  
0
Test  
0x32  
0x33  
0x34  
0x35  
[5:0]  
[13:8]  
[16]  
SCK  
SCK  
SCK  
SCK  
HLPOSLOC  
HLNEGLOC  
Test  
HL rising edge location.  
HL falling edge location.  
Test use only. Set to 1.  
[5:0]  
[13:8]  
[16]  
H3P1POSLOC  
H3P1NEGLOC  
Test  
Phase 1 (H1/H2) rising edge location in 3-phase mode.  
Phase 1 (H1/H2) falling edge location in 3-phase mode.  
Test use only. Set to 1.  
[5:0]  
[13:8]  
[16]  
RGPOSLOC  
RGNEGLOC  
Test  
RG rising edge location.  
RG falling edge location.  
Test use only. Set to 1.  
[0]  
H1HBLKRETIME  
Retime H1 HBLK to internal clock. Enabling retime adds one half cycle  
delay to HBLK position.  
0 = no retime.  
1 = retime.  
[1]  
[2]  
[3]  
[7:4]  
[8]  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
H2HBLKRETIME  
HLHBLKRETIME  
H3PHBLKRETIME Retime H3 HBLK to internal clock.  
HCLK_WIDTH  
Test  
HLHBLK  
Retime H2 HBLK to internal clock.  
Retime HL HBLK to internal clock.  
Enables wide H-clocks during HBLK interval. Set to 0 to disable.  
Test use only. Set to 0.  
1 = enable HBLK for HL.  
Test use only. Set to 0.  
Adds one additional retime operation to H1 HBLK signal.  
Adds one additional retime operation to H2 HBLK signal.  
Adds one additional retime operation to HL HBLK signal.  
Adds one additional retime operation to H3P HBLK signal  
(3-phase mode).  
[9]  
[19:10]  
[20]  
[21]  
[22]  
[23]  
Test  
H1FINERETIME  
H2FINERETIME  
HLFINERETIME  
H3PFINERETIME  
Rev. B | Page 99 of 112  
AD9920A  
Default  
Value  
Update  
Type  
Address  
Data Bits  
Name  
Description  
0x36  
[2:0]  
0x01  
SCK  
H1DRV  
H1 drive strength.  
0 = off.  
1 = 4.3 mA.  
2 = 8.6 mA.  
3 = 12.9 mA.  
4 = 17.3 mA.  
5 = 21.6 mA.  
6 = 25.9 mA.  
7 = 30.2 mA.  
[6:4]  
0x1  
0x1  
0x1  
0x1  
H2DRV  
H3DRV  
H4DRV  
HLDRV  
H2 drive strength (same range as H1DRV).  
H3 drive strength (same range as H1DRV).  
H4 drive strength (same range as H1DRV).  
HL drive strength.  
0 = off.  
[10:8]  
[14:12]  
[18:16]  
1 = 4.3 mA.  
2 = 8.6 mA.  
3 = 12.9 mA.  
4 = 4.3 mA.  
5 = 8.6 mA.  
6 = 12.9 mA.  
7 = 17.3 mA.  
[22:20]  
[2:0]  
[6:4]  
0x1  
0x1  
0x1  
0x1  
0x1  
0x1  
0x1  
0
RGDRV  
RG drive strength (same range as HLDRV).  
0x37  
SCK  
H5DRV  
H6DRV  
H7DRV  
H8DRV  
Test  
Test  
H5 drive strength (same range as H1DRV).  
H6 drive strength (same range as H1DRV).  
H7 drive strength (same range as H1DRV).  
H8 drive strength (same range as H1DRV).  
Test use only. Set to 1.  
[10:8]  
[14:12]  
[18:16]  
[22:20]  
[5:0]  
[13:8]  
[21:16]  
[5:0]  
Test use only. Set to 1.  
0x38  
0x39  
SCK  
SCK  
SHDLOC  
SHPLOC  
SHPWIDTH  
DOUTPHASEP  
DOUTPHASEN  
SHD sampling edge location.  
SHP sampling edge location.  
SHP width (controls input dc restore switch active time).  
DOUT phase control, positive edge. Specifies location of DOUT.  
DOUT phase control, negative edge. Always set to DOUTPHASEP +  
32 edges to maintain 50% duty cycle of internal DOUTPHASE clocking.  
0x20  
0x10  
0
[13:8]  
0x20  
[16]  
0
DCLKMODE  
DCLK mode.  
0 = DCLK tracks DOUT.  
1 = DCLK phase is fixed.  
Test use only. Set to 0.  
Invert DCLK output.  
0 = no inversion.  
[18:17]  
[19]  
0
0
Test  
DCLKINV  
1 = inversion of DCLK.  
[22:20]  
[27]  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Test  
Test use only. Set to 0.  
0x3A  
0x3B  
0x3C  
0x3D  
0x3E  
0x3F  
SCK  
SCK  
SCK  
SCK  
SCK  
SCK  
Test  
Do not access, or set to 0.  
Do not access, or set to 0.  
Do not access, or set to 0.  
Do not access, or set to 0.  
Do not access, or set to 0.  
Do not access, or set to 0.  
[27]  
UNUSED  
Test  
[27]  
[27]  
UNUSED  
Test  
[27]  
[27]  
UNUSED  
Table 58. Test Registers—Do Not Access  
Address  
Data Bits  
Default Value  
Update Type  
Name  
Description  
0x40 to 0x6F  
Test registers. Do not access.  
Rev. B | Page 100 of 112  
AD9920A  
Table 59. Shutter and GPO Registers  
Data  
Address Bits  
Default  
Value  
Update  
Type  
Name  
Description  
0x70  
[2:0]  
[5:3]  
0
0
VD  
PRIMARY_ACTION  
SECOND_ACTION  
Select action for primary and secondary counters.  
0 = idle (do nothing): autoreset on VD.  
1 = activate counter (primary: automatic exposure/read).  
2 = RapidShot: wrap/repeat counter.  
3 = ShotTimer: delay start of count.  
4 = ShotTimer with RapidShot.  
5 = SLR exposure (manual).  
6 = SLR read (manual).  
7 = force to idle.  
[13:6]  
0
MANUAL_TRIG  
1: manual trigger for GP signals when Protocol 1 is selected.  
Bit 6: GP1 manual trigger.  
Bit 13: GP8 manual trigger.  
0x71  
0x72  
[12:0]  
0
0
0
0
VD  
VD  
PRIMARY_MAX  
SECOND_MAX  
VDHD_MASK  
Primary counter maximum value.  
Secondary counter maximum value.  
Mask VD/HD during counter operation.  
[24:13]  
[27:25]  
[12:0]  
PRIMARY_DELAY  
Number of fields to delay before the next primary count (exposure)  
starts. For ShotTimer with RapidShot, the delay value is used between  
each repetition.  
[13]  
0
0
PRIMARY_SKIP  
For ShotTimer with RapidShot, use the primary delay value only before  
the first count (exposure).  
Number of fields to delay before the next secondary count (exposure)  
starts. For ShotTimer with RapidShot, the delay value is used between  
each repetition.  
[26:14]  
SECOND_DELAY  
[27]  
0
SECOND_SKIP  
For ShotTimer with RapidShot, use the secondary delay value only  
before the first count (exposure).  
0x73  
[2:0]  
[5:3]  
[8:6]  
0
0
0
VD  
GP1_PROTOCOL  
GP2_PROTOCOL  
GP3_PROTOCOL  
Selects protocol for each general-purpose signal.  
0 = idle.  
1 = no counter association. Use MANUAL_TRIG bits to enable each GP  
signal.  
[11:9]  
0
0
0
0
0
GP4_PROTOCOL  
GP5_PROTOCOL  
GP6_PROTOCOL  
GP7_PROTOCOL  
GP8_PROTOCOL  
2 = test use only.  
3 = test use only.  
4 = link to mode counter.  
5 = link to primary counter.  
6 = link to secondary counter.  
7 = keep on.  
[14:12]  
[17:15]  
[20:18]  
[23:21]  
0x74  
0x75  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[26]  
0
0
0x01  
VD  
VD/SG  
VD/SG  
SGMASK_NUM  
SUBCKMASK_NUM  
Exposure duration (number of fields to mask SG) for LS operation.  
Exposure + readout duration (number of fields to mask SUBCK) for LS.  
SUBCKTOG_UPDATE 0 = SUBCK HP toggles and the registers involved in SUBCK masking  
(Register 0x78 and Register 0x74, Bits[27:13]) are updated at SG line.  
1 = updated at update line (VD updated).  
SUBCKMASK_SKIP1  
Test  
SUBCKSUPPRESS  
SUBCKNUM  
SG_SUPPRESS  
SUBCK_POL  
[27]  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
VD/SG  
VD/SG  
Skip the SUBCK mask for the first exposure field only.  
Test purpose only. Must be set to 0.  
Number of lines after VSG line to begin SUBCK pulses.  
Number of SUBCK pulses per field. Must be set less than VDLEN.  
Suppress the SG and allow SUBCK to finish at SUBCKNUM.  
SUBCK start polarity.  
[0]  
[13:1]  
[26:14]  
[27]  
0x76  
0x77  
0x78  
0x79  
[0]  
[1]  
VD/SG  
VD/SG  
VD/SG  
VD  
TESTMODE  
Test use only. Must be set to 0.  
[13:0]  
[27:14]  
[13:0]  
[27:14]  
[25:0]  
SUBCK_TOG1  
SUBCK_TOG2  
SUBCKHP_TOG1  
SUBCKHP_TOG2  
TESTMODE  
SUBCK Toggle Position 1.  
SUBCK Toggle Position 2.  
High precision SUBCK Toggle Position 1.  
High precision SUBCK Toggle Position 2.  
Test use only. Must be set to 0.  
Rev. B | Page 101 of 112  
 
AD9920A  
Data  
Address Bits  
Default  
Value  
Update  
Type  
Name  
Description  
0x7A  
[0]  
[1]  
[2]  
[3]  
[4]  
[5]  
[6]  
[7]  
[8]  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
VD  
GP1_POL  
GP2_POL  
GP3_POL  
GP4_POL  
GP5_POL  
GP6_POL  
GP7_POL  
GP8_POL  
SEL_GP1  
GP1 low/high start polarity.  
GP2 low/high start polarity.  
GP3 low/high start polarity.  
GP4 low/high start polarity.  
GP5 low/high start polarity.  
GP6 low/high start polarity.  
GP7 low/high start polarity.  
GP8 low/high start polarity.  
0x01  
1 = GP1 signal is selected for GPO1 output.  
0 = internal signal is selected.  
[9]  
0x01  
0x01  
SEL_GP2  
SEL_GP3  
1 = GP2 signal is selected for GPO2 output.  
0 = internal signal is selected.  
1 = GP3 signal is selected for GPO3 output.  
0 = internal signal is selected.  
[10]  
[11]  
[12]  
[13]  
[14]  
[15]  
[23:16]  
[24]  
0x01  
0x01  
0x01  
0x01  
0x01  
0
SEL_GP4  
SEL_GP5  
SEL_GP6  
SEL_GP7  
SEL_GP8  
GPO_OUTPUT_EN  
GPO5_OVERRIDE  
1 = GP4 signal is selected for GPO4 output. 0 = XSUBCK is selected.  
1 = GP5 signal is selected for GPO5 output. 0 = XV21 is selected.  
1 = GP6 signal is selected for GPO6 output. 0 = XV22 is selected.  
1 = GP7 signal is selected for GPO7 output. 0 = XV23 is selected.  
1 = GP8 signal is selected for GPO8 output. 0 = XV24 is selected.  
1 = GPO enabled. 0 = GPO is high-Z (default).  
0
1 = when GPO5 is configured as an input, this register overrides the  
internal OUT_CONT.  
[25]  
[26]  
[27]  
[7:0]  
0
0
0
0
GPO6_OVERRIDE  
GPO7_OVERRIDE  
GPO8_OVERRIDE  
GPx_USE_LUT  
1 = when GPO6 is configured as an input, this register overrides the  
internal HBLK.  
1 = when GPO7 is configured as an input, this register overrides the  
internal CLPOB.  
1 = when GPO8 is configured as an input, this register overrides the  
internal PBLK.  
0x7B  
VD  
Enable LUT for each GPO signal.  
1 = enable.  
0 = disable (use normal GP signal).  
[11:8]  
0000  
LUT_FOR_GP12  
LUT_FOR_GP34  
LUT_FOR_GP56  
LUT_FOR_GP78  
GP1_TOG1_FD  
GP1_TOG1_LN  
GP1_TOG1_PX  
GP1_TOG2_FD  
GP1_TOG2_LN  
GP1_TOG2_PX  
GP1_TOG3_FD  
GP1_TOG3_LN  
GP1_TOG3_PX  
GP1_TOG4_FD  
GP1_TOG4_LN  
GP1_TOG4_PX  
GP2_TOG1_FD  
GP2_TOG1_LN  
GP2_TOG1_PX  
GP2_TOG2_FD  
GP2_TOG2_LN  
GP2_TOG2_PX  
Two-input lookup table results.  
Examples: {LUT_FOR_GP12} Å [GP2:GP1].  
{0110} = GP2 XOR GP1; {1110} = GP2 OR GP1.  
{0111} = GP2 NAND GP1; {1000} = GP2 AND GP1.  
[15:12] 0000  
[19:16] 0000  
[23:20] 0000  
0x7C  
0x7D  
0x7E  
0x7F  
0x80  
0x81  
0x82  
0x83  
0x84  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
General-Purpose Signal 1, first toggle position, field location.  
General-Purpose Signal 1, first toggle position, line location.  
General-Purpose Signal 1, first toggle position, pixel location.  
General-Purpose Signal 1, second toggle position, field location.  
General-Purpose Signal 1, second toggle position, line location.  
General-Purpose Signal 1, second toggle position, pixel location.  
General-Purpose Signal 1, third toggle position, field location.  
General-Purpose Signal 1, third toggle position, line location.  
General-Purpose Signal 1, third toggle position, pixel location.  
General-Purpose Signal 1, fourth toggle position, field location.  
General-Purpose Signal 1, fourth toggle position, line location.  
General-Purpose Signal 1, fourth toggle position, pixel location.  
General-Purpose Signal 2, first toggle position, field location.  
General-Purpose Signal 2, first toggle position, line location.  
General-Purpose Signal 2, first toggle position, pixel location.  
General-Purpose Signal 2, second toggle position, field location.  
General-Purpose Signal 2, second toggle position, line location.  
General-Purpose Signal 2, second toggle position, pixel location.  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
Rev. B | Page 102 of 112  
AD9920A  
Data  
Address Bits  
Default  
Value  
Update  
Type  
Name  
Description  
0x85  
0x86  
0x87  
0x88  
0x89  
0x8A  
0x8B  
0x8C  
0x8D  
0x8E  
0x8F  
0x90  
0x91  
0x92  
0x93  
0x94  
0x95  
0x96  
0x97  
0x98  
0x99  
0x9A  
0x9B  
0x9C  
0x9D  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
GP2_TOG3_FD  
GP2_TOG3_LN  
GP2_TOG3_PX  
GP2_TOG4_FD  
GP2_TOG4_LN  
GP2_TOG4_PX  
GP3_TOG1_FD  
GP3_TOG1_LN  
GP3_TOG1_PX  
GP3_TOG2_FD  
GP3_TOG2_LN  
GP3_TOG2_PX  
GP3_TOG3_FD  
GP3_TOG3_LN  
GP3_TOG3_PX  
GP3_TOG4_FD  
GP3_TOG4_LN  
GP3_TOG4_PX  
GP4_TOG1_FD  
GP4_TOG1_LN  
GP4_TOG1_PX  
GP4_TOG2_FD  
GP4_TOG2_LN  
GP4_TOG2_PX  
GP4_TOG3_FD  
GP4_TOG3_LN  
GP4_TOG3_PX  
GP4_TOG4_FD  
GP4_TOG4_LN  
GP4_TOG4_PX  
GP5_TOG1_FD  
GP5_TOG1_LN  
GP5_TOG1_PX  
GP5_TOG2_FD  
GP5_TOG2_LN  
GP5_TOG2_PX  
GP5_TOG3_FD  
GP5_TOG3_LN  
GP5_TOG3_PX  
GP5_TOG4_FD  
GP5_TOG4_LN  
GP5_TOG4_PX  
GP6_TOG1_FD  
GP6_TOG1_LN  
GP6_TOG1_PX  
GP6_TOG2_FD  
GP6_TOG2_LN  
GP6_TOG2_PX  
GP6_TOG3_FD  
GP6_TOG3_LN  
General-Purpose Signal 2, third toggle position, field location.  
General-Purpose Signal 2, third toggle position, line location.  
General-Purpose Signal 2, third toggle position, pixel location.  
General-Purpose Signal 2, fourth toggle position, field location.  
General-Purpose Signal 2, fourth toggle position, line location.  
General-Purpose Signal 2, fourth toggle position, pixel location.  
General-Purpose Signal 3, first toggle position, field location.  
General-Purpose Signal 3, first toggle position, line location.  
General-Purpose Signal 3, first toggle position, pixel location.  
General-Purpose Signal 3, second toggle position, field location.  
General-Purpose Signal 3, second toggle position, line location.  
General-Purpose Signal 3, second toggle position, pixel location.  
General-Purpose Signal 3, third toggle position, field location.  
General-Purpose Signal 3, third toggle position, line location.  
General-Purpose Signal 3, third toggle position, pixel location.  
General-Purpose Signal 3, fourth toggle position, field location.  
General-Purpose Signal 3, fourth toggle position, line location.  
General-Purpose Signal 3, fourth toggle position, pixel location.  
General-Purpose Signal 4, first toggle position, field location.  
General-Purpose Signal 4, first toggle position, line location.  
General-Purpose Signal 4, first toggle position, pixel location.  
General-Purpose Signal 4, second toggle position, field location.  
General-Purpose Signal 4, second toggle position, line location.  
General-Purpose Signal 4, second toggle position, pixel location.  
General-Purpose Signal 4, third toggle position, field location.  
General-Purpose Signal 4, third toggle position, line location.  
General-Purpose Signal 4, third toggle position, pixel location.  
General-Purpose Signal 4, fourth toggle position, field location.  
General-Purpose Signal 4, fourth toggle position, line location.  
General-Purpose Signal 4, fourth toggle position, pixel location.  
General-Purpose Signal 5, first toggle position, field location.  
General-Purpose Signal 5, first toggle position, line location.  
General-Purpose Signal 5, first toggle position, pixel location.  
General-Purpose Signal 5, second toggle position, field location.  
General-Purpose Signal 5, second toggle position, line location.  
General-Purpose Signal 5, second toggle position, pixel location.  
General-Purpose Signal 5, third toggle position, field location.  
General-Purpose Signal 5, third toggle position, line location.  
General-Purpose Signal 5, third toggle position, pixel location.  
General-Purpose Signal 5, fourth toggle position, field location.  
General-Purpose Signal 5, fourth toggle position, line location.  
General-Purpose Signal 5, fourth toggle position, pixel location.  
General-Purpose Signal 6, first toggle position, field location.  
General-Purpose Signal 6, first toggle position, line location.  
General-Purpose Signal 6, first toggle position, pixel location.  
General-Purpose Signal 6, second toggle position, field location.  
General-Purpose Signal 6, second toggle position, line location.  
General-Purpose Signal 6, second toggle position, pixel location.  
General-Purpose Signal 6, third toggle position, field location.  
General-Purpose Signal 6, third toggle position, line location.  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
Rev. B | Page 103 of 112  
AD9920A  
Data  
Address Bits  
[12:0]  
Default  
Value  
Update  
Type  
Name  
Description  
0x9E  
0x9F  
0xA0  
0xA1  
0xA2  
0xA3  
0xA4  
0xA5  
0xA6  
0xA7  
0xA8  
0xA9  
0xAA  
0xAB  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
GP6_TOG3_PX  
GP6_TOG4_FD  
GP6_TOG4_LN  
GP6_TOG4_PX  
GP7_TOG1_FD  
GP7_TOG1_LN  
GP7_TOG1_PX  
GP7_TOG2_FD  
GP7_TOG2_LN  
GP7_TOG2_PX  
GP7_TOG3_FD  
GP7_TOG3_LN  
GP7_TOG3_PX  
GP7_TOG4_FD  
GP7_TOG4_LN  
GP7_TOG4_PX  
GP8_TOG1_FD  
GP8_TOG1_LN  
GP8_TOG1_PX  
GP8_TOG2_FD  
GP8_TOG2_LN  
GP8_TOG2_PX  
GP8_TOG3_FD  
GP8_TOG3_LN  
GP8_TOG3_PX  
GP8_TOG4_FD  
GP8_TOG4_LN  
GP8_TOG4_PX  
GP_LN_MODE  
UNUSED  
General-Purpose Signal 6, third toggle position, pixel location.  
General-Purpose Signal 6, fourth toggle position, field location.  
General-Purpose Signal 6, fourth toggle position, line location.  
General-Purpose Signal 6, fourth toggle position, pixel location.  
General-Purpose Signal 7, first toggle position, field location.  
General-Purpose Signal 7, first toggle position, line location.  
General-Purpose Signal 7, first toggle position, pixel location.  
General-Purpose Signal 7, second toggle position, field location.  
General-Purpose Signal 7, second toggle position, line location.  
General-Purpose Signal 7, second toggle position, pixel location.  
General-Purpose Signal 7, third toggle position, field location.  
General-Purpose Signal 7, third toggle position, line location.  
General-Purpose Signal 7, third toggle position, pixel location.  
General-Purpose Signal 7, fourth toggle position, field location.  
General-Purpose Signal 7, fourth toggle position, line location.  
General-Purpose Signal 7, fourth toggle position, pixel location.  
General-Purpose Signal 8, first toggle position, field location.  
General-Purpose Signal 8, first toggle position, line location.  
General-Purpose Signal 8, first toggle position, pixel location.  
General-Purpose Signal 8, second toggle position, field location.  
General-Purpose Signal 8, second toggle position, line location.  
General-Purpose Signal 8, second toggle position, pixel location.  
General-Purpose Signal 8, third toggle position, field location.  
General-Purpose Signal 8, third toggle position, line location.  
General-Purpose Signal 8, third toggle position, pixel location.  
General-Purpose Signal 8, fourth toggle position, field location.  
General-Purpose Signal 8, fourth toggle position, line location.  
General-Purpose Signal 8, fourth toggle position, pixel location.  
1 = outputs specified GP pulse on every line.  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[7:0]  
0xAC  
0xAD  
0xAE  
0xAF  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
[27]  
Do not access, or set to 0.  
[27]  
UNUSED  
Do not access, or set to 0.  
[27]  
UNUSED  
Do not access, or set to 0.  
Table 60. Update Control Registers  
Data  
Address Bits  
Default  
Value  
Update  
Type  
Name  
Description  
0xB0  
[15:0]  
0x5803  
SCK  
AFE_UPDT_SCK  
Each bit corresponds to one address location.  
Bit 0: 1 = update Address 0x00 on SL rising edge.  
Bit 1: 1 = update Address 0x01 on SL rising edge.  
Bit 15: 1 = update Address 0x0F on SL rising edge.  
0xB1  
[15:0]  
0xA7FC  
SCK  
AFE_UPDT_VD  
Each bit corresponds to one address location.  
Bit 0: 1 = update Address 0x00 on VD rising edge.  
Bit 1: 1 = update Address 0x01 on VD rising edge.  
Bit 15: 1 = update Address 0x0F on VD rising edge.  
0xB2  
0xB3  
0xB4  
0xB5  
0xB6  
0xB7  
0xB8  
0xB9  
[15:0]  
[15:0]  
[15:0]  
[15:0]  
[15:0]  
[15:0]  
[27:0]  
[27:0]  
0xD8FD  
0x2702  
0xFFF9  
0x0006  
0xFFFF  
0000  
SCK  
SCK  
SCK  
SCK  
SCK  
SCK  
MISC_UPDT_SCK  
MISC_UPDT_VD  
VDHD_UPDT_SCK  
VDHD_UPDT_VD  
TC_UPDT_SCK  
TC_UPDT_VD  
Test  
Enable SCK update of miscellaneous registers, Address 0x10 to Address 0x1F.  
EnableVD update of miscellaneous registers, Address 0x10 to Address 0x1F.  
Enable SCK update of VD/HD registers, Address 0x20 to Address 0x2F.  
Enable VD update of VD/HD registers, Address 0x20 to Address 0x2F.  
Enable SCK update of timing core registers, Address 0x30 to Address 0x3F.  
Enable VD update of timing core registers, Address 0x30 to Address 0x3F.  
Test register. Do not access, or write to 0x04.  
0x04  
0
UNUSED  
Do not access, or write to 0x00.  
Rev. B | Page 104 of 112  
AD9920A  
Data  
Address Bits  
Default  
Value  
Update  
Type  
Name  
Description  
0xBA  
0xBB  
0xBC  
0xBD  
0xBE  
0xBF  
[27:0]  
[27:0]  
[27:0]  
[27:0]  
[27:0]  
[27:0]  
0
0
0
0
0
0
UNUSED  
UNUSED  
UNUSED  
UNUSED  
UNUSED  
UNUSED  
Do not access, or write to 0x00.  
Do not access, or write to 0x00.  
Do not access, or write to 0x00.  
Do not access, or write to 0x00.  
Do not access, or write to 0x00.  
Do not access, or write to 0x00.  
Table 61. Extra Registers  
Address Data Bits Default Value Update Name  
Description  
0xC0  
0xC1  
0xC2  
0xC3  
[27:0]  
[27:0]  
[27:0]  
[7:0]  
0
0
0
0
0
VD  
VD  
VD  
SCK  
Test  
Test  
Test  
Do not access, or write to 0x00.  
Do not access, or write to 0x00.  
Do not access, or write to 0x00.  
GPO_MASK_HIGH 1 = masks GPO[x] to high. Takes priority over normal operation.  
GPO_MASK_LOW 1 = masks GPO[x] to low. Takes priority over normal operation and  
GPO_MASK_HIGH.  
[15:8]  
0xC4  
0xC5  
0xC6  
0xC7  
0xC8  
0xC9  
0xCA  
0xCB  
0xCC  
0xCD  
0xCE  
0xCF  
0xD0  
0xD1  
[27:0]  
[27:0]  
[27:0]  
[27:0]  
[27:0]  
[27:0]  
[27:0]  
[27:0]  
[27:0]  
[27:0]  
[27:0]  
[27:0]  
[27:0]  
[19:0]  
[20]  
0
VD  
Test  
Test register. Do not access, or set to 0.  
Test register. Do not access, or set to 0x1516.  
Unused register. Do not access, or set to 0.  
Unused register. Do not access, or set to 0.  
Test register. Do not access, or set to 0.  
Test register. Do not access, or set to 0xFFFF.  
Test register. Do not access, or set to 0.  
Test register. Do not access, or set to 0.  
Unused register. Do not access, or set to 0.  
Unused register. Do not access, or set to 0.  
Unused register. Do not access, or set to 0.  
Unused register. Do not access, or set to 0.  
Test register. Do not access, or set to 0.  
Test use only. Set to 0.  
Must be set to 1 to start the device.  
Test register. Do not access, or set to 0.  
Test register. Do not access, or set to 0.  
Test use only. Set to 0.  
1 = allow observation of internal signals at GPO1 to GPO3 outputs  
(must also set SEL_GPx bits low).  
0x1516  
SCK  
Test  
0
UNUSED  
UNUSED  
Test  
0
0
SCK  
SCK  
SCK  
SCK  
0xFFFF  
Test  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Test  
Test  
UNUSED  
UNUSED  
UNUSED  
UNUSED  
Test  
SCK  
SCK  
Test  
STARTUP  
Test  
0xD2  
0xD3  
0xD4  
[27:0]  
[27:0]  
[0]  
SCK  
SCK  
SCK  
Test  
Test  
GPO_INT_EN  
[1]  
Note that GPO4 to GPO8 continue to output normal GP toggles.  
GPO1: internal clock.  
GPO2: CLPOB.  
GPO3: delayed sample clock.  
Test use only. Set to 0.  
Test use only. Set to 0.  
Test use only. Set to 0xA10.  
Test use only. Set to 0.  
[9:2]  
0
Test  
Test  
Test  
Test  
0xD5  
0xD6  
0xD7  
0xD8  
[27:0]  
[27:0]  
[27:0]  
[27:0]  
0
SCK  
SCK  
SCK  
SCK  
0xA10  
0
0x888  
DOUT_STRENGTH Controls drive strength of data output drivers.  
0x888 = normal drive strength.  
0x848 = weak drive strength.  
0x808 = weaker drive strength.  
0xD9  
0xDA  
0xDB  
0xDC  
0xDD  
[27:0]  
[27:0]  
[27:0]  
[27:0]  
[27:0]  
0
0
SCK  
SCK  
SCK  
SCK  
SCK  
Test  
Test  
Test  
Test  
Test  
Test use only. Set to 0.  
Test use only. Set to 0.  
Test use only. Set to 0.  
Test use only. Set to 0xF7F.  
Test use only. Set to 0x14.  
0xF7F  
0x14  
Rev. B | Page 105 of 112  
AD9920A  
Address Data Bits Default Value Update Name  
Description  
0xDE  
0xDF  
[27:0]  
[27:0]  
0
0
SCK  
SCK  
Test  
Test  
Test use only. Set to 0.  
Test use only. Set to 0.  
Table 62. V-Pattern Group (VPAT) Register Map (Default Values Are Undefined)  
Address  
Data Bits  
Default Value  
Update Type  
Name  
Description  
0x00  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCP  
XV1TOG1  
XV1TOG2  
XV1TOG3  
XV1TOG4  
XV2TOG1  
XV2TOG2  
XV2TOG3  
XV2TOG4  
XV3TOG1  
XV3TOG2  
XV3TOG3  
XV3TOG4  
XV4TOG1  
XV4TOG2  
XV4TOG3  
XV4TOG4  
XV5TOG1  
XV5TOG2  
XV5TOG3  
XV5TOG4  
XV6TOG1  
XV6TOG2  
XV6TOG3  
XV6TOG4  
XV7TOG1  
XV7TOG2  
XV7TOG3  
XV7TOG4  
XV8TOG1  
XV8TOG2  
XV8TOG3  
XV8TOG4  
XV9TOG1  
XV9TOG2  
XV9TOG3  
XV9TOG4  
XV10TOG1  
XV10TOG2  
XV10TOG3  
XV10TOG4  
XV11TOG1  
XV11TOG2  
XV11TOG3  
XV11TOG4  
XV12TOG1  
XV12TOG2  
XV1 Toggle Position 1.  
XV1 Toggle Position 2.  
XV1 Toggle Position 3.  
XV1 Toggle Position 4.  
XV2 Toggle Position 1.  
XV2 Toggle Position 2.  
XV2 Toggle Position 3.  
XV2 Toggle Position 4.  
XV3 Toggle Position 1.  
XV3 Toggle Position 2.  
XV3 Toggle Position 3.  
XV3 Toggle Position 4.  
XV4 Toggle Position 1.  
XV4 Toggle Position 2.  
XV4 Toggle Position 3.  
XV4 Toggle Position 4.  
XV5 Toggle Position 1.  
XV5 Toggle Position 2.  
XV5 Toggle Position 3.  
XV5 Toggle Position 4.  
XV6 Toggle Position 1.  
XV6 Toggle Position 2.  
XV6 Toggle Position 3.  
XV6 Toggle Position 4.  
XV7 Toggle Position 1.  
XV7 Toggle Position 2.  
XV7 Toggle Position 3.  
XV7 Toggle Position 4.  
XV8 Toggle Position 1.  
XV8 Toggle Position 2.  
XV8 Toggle Position 3.  
XV8 Toggle Position 4.  
XV9 Toggle Position 1.  
XV9 Toggle Position 2.  
XV9 Toggle Position 3.  
XV9 Toggle Position 4.  
XV10 Toggle Position 1.  
XV10 Toggle Position 2.  
XV10 Toggle Position 3.  
XV10 Toggle Position 4.  
XV11 Toggle Position 1.  
XV11 Toggle Position 2.  
XV11 Toggle Position 3.  
XV11 Toggle Position 4.  
XV12 Toggle Position 1.  
XV12 Toggle Position 2.  
0x01  
0x02  
0x03  
0x04  
0x05  
0x06  
0x07  
0x08  
0x09  
0x0A  
0x0B  
0x0C  
0x0D  
0x0E  
0x0F  
0x10  
0x11  
0x12  
0x13  
0x14  
0x15  
0x16  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
Rev. B | Page 106 of 112  
AD9920A  
Address  
Data Bits  
[12:0]  
Default Value  
Update Type  
Name  
Description  
0x17  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCP  
XV12TOG3  
XV12TOG4  
XV13TOG1  
XV13TOG2  
XV13TOG3  
XV13TOG4  
XV14TOG1  
XV14TOG2  
XV14TOG3  
XV14TOG4  
XV15TOG1  
XV15TOG2  
XV15TOG3  
XV15TOG4  
XV16TOG1  
XV16TOG2  
XV16TOG3  
XV16TOG4  
XV17TOG1  
XV17TOG2  
XV17TOG3  
XV17TOG4  
XV18TOG1  
XV18TOG2  
XV18TOG3  
XV18TOG4  
XV19TOG1  
XV19TOG2  
XV19TOG3  
XV19TOG4  
XV20TOG1  
XV20TOG2  
XV20TOG3  
XV20TOG4  
XV21TOG1  
XV21TOG2  
XV21TOG3  
XV21TOG4  
XV22TOG1  
XV22TOG2  
XV22TOG3  
XV22TOG4  
XV23TOG1  
XV23TOG2  
XV23TOG3  
XV23TOG4  
XV24TOG1  
XV24TOG2  
XV24TOG3  
XV24TOG4  
XV12 Toggle Position 3.  
XV12 Toggle Position 4.  
XV13 Toggle Position 1.  
XV13 Toggle Position 2.  
XV13 Toggle Position 3.  
XV13 Toggle Position 4.  
XV14 Toggle Position 1.  
XV14 Toggle Position 2.  
XV14 Toggle Position 3.  
XV14 Toggle Position 4.  
XV15 Toggle Position 1.  
XV15 Toggle Position 2.  
XV15 Toggle Position 3.  
XV15 Toggle Position 4.  
XV16 Toggle Position 1.  
XV16 Toggle Position 2.  
XV16 Toggle Position 3.  
XV16 Toggle Position 4.  
XV17 Toggle Position 1.  
XV17 Toggle Position 2.  
XV17 Toggle Position 3.  
XV17 Toggle Position 4.  
XV18 Toggle Position 1.  
XV18 Toggle Position 2.  
XV18 Toggle Position 3.  
XV18 Toggle Position 4.  
XV19 Toggle Position 1.  
XV19 Toggle Position 2.  
XV19 Toggle Position 3.  
XV19 Toggle Position 4.  
XV20 Toggle Position 1.  
XV20 Toggle Position 2.  
XV20 Toggle Position 3.  
XV20 Toggle Position 4.  
XV21 Toggle Position 1.  
XV21 Toggle Position 2.  
XV21 Toggle Position 3.  
XV21 Toggle Position 4.  
XV22 Toggle Position 1.  
XV22 Toggle Position 2.  
XV22 Toggle Position 3.  
XV22 Toggle Position 4.  
XV23 Toggle Position 1.  
XV23 Toggle Position 2.  
XV23 Toggle Position 3.  
XV23 Toggle Position 4.  
XV24 Toggle Position 1.  
XV24 Toggle Position 2.  
XV24 Toggle Position 3.  
XV24 Toggle Position 4.  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
0x18  
0x19  
0x1A  
0x1B  
0x1C  
0x1D  
0x1E  
0x1F  
0x20  
0x21  
0x22  
0x23  
0x24  
0x25  
0x26  
0x27  
0x28  
0x29  
0x2A  
0x2B  
0x2C  
0x2D  
0x2E  
0x2F  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
[25:13]  
Rev. B | Page 107 of 112  
AD9920A  
Table 63. V-Sequence (VSEQ) Registers (Default Values Are Undefined)  
Data  
Address Bits  
Default Update  
Value  
Type  
Name  
Description  
0x00  
[0]  
[1]  
[5:2]  
[6]  
[9:7]  
X
X
X
X
X
SCP  
CLPOBPOL  
PBLKPOL  
HOLD  
VSEQALT_EN  
SPC_PAT_EN  
CLPOB start polarity.  
PBLK start polarity.  
1 = enable HOLD function for each VPAT group (A, B, C, D).  
Special V-sequence alternation enable.  
1 = enable use of special vertical pattern insertion into VPATA sequence.  
Bit 0: Use VPATB as the special pattern.  
Bit 1: Use VPATC as the special pattern.  
Bit 2: Use VPATD as the special pattern.  
[13:10]  
[15:14]  
X
X
CONCAT_GRP  
VREP_MODE  
Combine multiple VPAT groups together in one sequence. Set register  
equal to 0x01 to enable.  
Defines V-alternation repetition mode.  
00 = single-pattern alternation for all groups.  
01 = two-pattern alternation for all groups.  
10 = three-pattern alternation for Group A; Groups B/C/D follow pattern  
{0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 1…}.  
11 = four-pattern alternation for Group A; two-pattern for Groups B/C/D.  
[19:16]  
[21:20]  
X
X
LASTREPLEN_EN  
HBLK_MODE  
Enable a separate pattern length to be used during the last repetition of  
the V-sequence. One bit for each group (A, B, C, and D); Group A is the LSB.  
Set bit high to enable. Recommended value is enabled.  
Selection of HBLK modes.  
00 = HBLK Mode 0 (normal six-toggle operation).  
01 = HBLK Mode 1.  
10 = test use only; do not access.  
11 = test use only; do not access.  
Test use only. Set to 0.  
1 = enable SUBCK masking feature.  
HD line length for even lines.  
HD line length for odd lines.  
[23:22]  
[24]  
X
X
X
X
X
Test  
SUBCK_MASK  
HDLENE  
0x01  
0x02  
0x03  
[13:0]  
[13:0]  
[23:0]  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
HDLENO  
VSGPATSEL  
Select which two toggle positions are used by each V-output  
when they are configured as VSG pulses (in Miscellaneous Register 0x1C).  
0 = use Toggle 1, Toggle 2.  
1 = use Toggle 3, Toggle 4.  
0x04  
0x05  
[12:0]  
X
X
X
X
SCP  
SCP  
LASTREPLEN_A  
LASTREPLEN_B  
LASTREPLEN_C  
LASTREPLEN_D  
Last repetition length for Group A. Must be enabled using LASTREPLEN_EN  
register. Set equal to VLENA register.  
Last repetition length for Group B. Must be enabled using LASTREPLEN_EN  
register. Set equal to VLENB register.  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
Last repetition length for Group C. Must be enabled using LASTREPLEN_EN  
register. Set equal to VLENC register.  
Last repetition length for Group D. Must be enabled using LASTREPLEN_EN  
register. Set equal to VLEND register.  
[25:13]  
0x06  
0x07  
[23:0]  
[23:0]  
X
X
SCP  
SCP  
VPOL  
Starting polarities for each V-output signal.  
GROUPSEL_0  
Select to which group each V1 to V12 signal is assigned.  
00 = Group A.  
01 = Group B.  
10 = Group C.  
11 = Group D.  
Bits[1:0]: V1.  
Bits[3:2]: V2.  
Bits[23:22]: V12.  
Rev. B | Page 108 of 112  
 
AD9920A  
Data  
Address Bits  
Default Update  
Value  
Type  
Name  
Description  
0x08  
[23:0]  
X
SCP  
GROUPSEL_1  
Select to which group each V13 to V24 signal is assigned.  
00 = Group A.  
01 = Group B.  
10 = Group C.  
11 = Group D.  
Bits[1:0]: V13.  
Bits[3:2]: V14.  
Bits[23:22]: V24.  
0x09  
[4:0]  
[9:5]  
[14:10]  
[19:15]  
[20]  
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCP  
VPATSELA  
VPATSELB  
VPATSELC  
VPATSELD  
SEQ_ALT_INC  
SEQ_ALT_RST  
Selected VPAT group for Group A, from VPAT Group 0 to Group 31.  
Selected VPAT group for Group B, from VPAT Group 0 to Group 31.  
Selected VPAT group for Group C, from VPAT Group 0 to Group 31.  
Selected VPAT group for Group D, from VPAT Group 0 to Group 31.  
1 = increment sequence number on next line.  
[21]  
1 = reset sequence number to sequence defined for that particular region  
in the field register.  
0x0A  
0x0B  
0x0C  
0x0D  
0x0E  
0x0F  
0x10  
0x11  
0x12  
0x13  
0x14  
0x15  
0x16  
0x17  
0x18  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[20:13]  
[21]  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
VSTARTA  
VLENA  
Start position of selected V-pattern Group A.  
Length of selected V-pattern Group A.  
VREPA_1  
VREPA_2  
Number of repetitions for V-pattern Group A for first lines.  
Number of repetitions for V-pattern Group A for second lines.  
Number of repetitions for V-pattern Group A for third lines.  
Number of repetitions for V-pattern Group A for fourth lines.  
Start position of selected V-pattern Group B.  
VREPA_3  
VREPA_4  
VSTARTB  
VLENB  
Length of selected V-pattern Group B.  
VREPB_ODD  
VREPB_EVEN  
VSTARTC  
Number of repetitions for V-pattern Group B for odd lines.  
Number of repetitions for V-pattern Group B for even lines.  
Start position of selected V-pattern Group C.  
VLENC  
Length of selected V-pattern Group C.  
VREPC_ODD  
VREPC_EVEN  
VSTARTD  
Number of repetitions for V-pattern Group C for odd lines.  
Number of repetitions for V-pattern Group C for even lines.  
Start position of selected V-pattern Group D.  
VLEND  
Length of selected V-pattern Group D.  
VREPD_ODD  
VREPD_EVEN  
FREEZE1  
RESUME1  
FREEZE2  
RESUME2  
FREEZE3  
RESUME3  
FREEZE4  
RESUME4  
HBLKSTART  
HBLKEND  
HBLKLEN  
Number of repetitions for V-pattern Group D for odd lines.  
Number of repetitions for V-pattern Group D for even lines.  
Holds the V-outputs at their current levels.  
Resumes the operation of V-outputs to finish the pattern.  
Holds the V-outputs at their current levels.  
Resumes the operation of V-outputs to finish the pattern.  
Holds the V-outputs at their current levels.  
Resumes the operation of V-outputs to finish the pattern.  
Holds the V-outputs at their current levels.  
Resumes the operation of V-outputs to finish the pattern.  
Start location for HBLK in HBLK Mode 0 and HBLK Mode 1.  
End location for HBLK in HBLK Mode 0 and HBLK Mode 1.  
HBLK length in HBLK Mode 0 and Mode 1.  
Number of HBLK repetitions in HBLK Mode 0 and HBLK Mode 1.  
Masking polarity for H1/H3/H5/H7 during HBLK.  
Masking polarity for H2/H4/H6/H8 during HBLK.  
Masking polarity for HL during HBLK.  
HBLKREP  
HBLKMASK_H1  
HBLKMASK_H2  
HBLKMASK_HL  
HBLKMASK_H3P  
HBLKTOGO1  
HBLKTOGO2  
[22]  
[23]  
[24]  
Masking polarity for H3P during 3-phase mode during HBLK.  
First HBLK toggle position for odd lines, or RA0H1REPA/B/C in HBLK Mode 1.  
Second HBLK toggle position for odd lines, or RA1H1REPA/B/C.  
0x19  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
SCP  
Rev. B | Page 109 of 112  
AD9920A  
Data  
Address Bits  
Default Update  
Value  
Type  
Name  
Description  
0x1A  
0x1B  
0x1C  
0x1D  
0x1E  
0x1F  
0x20  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[16:13]  
[20:17]  
[2:0]  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCP  
HBLKTOGO3  
HBLKTOGO4  
HBLKTOGO5  
HBLKTOGO6  
HBLKTOGE1  
Third HBLK toggle position for odd lines, or RA2H1REPA/B/C.  
Fourth HBLK toggle position for odd lines, or RA3H1REPA/B/C.  
Fifth HBLK toggle position for odd lines, or RA4H1REPA/B/C.  
Sixth HBLK toggle position for odd lines, or RA5H1REPA/B/C.  
First HBLK toggle position for even lines, or RA0H2REPA/B/C.  
Second HBLK toggle position for even lines, or RA1H2REPA/B/C.  
Third HBLK toggle position for even lines, or RA2H2REPA/B/C.  
Fourth HBLK toggle position for even lines, or RA3H2REPA/B/C.  
Fifth HBLK toggle position for even lines, or RA4H2REPA/B/C.  
Sixth HBLK toggle position for even lines, or RA5H2REPA/B/C.  
HBLK repeat area Start Position A for HBLK Mode 1. Set to 8191 if not used.  
HBLK repeat area Start Position B for HBLK Mode 1. Set to 8191 if not used.  
HBLK repeat area Start Position C for HBLK Mode 1. Set to 8191 if not used.  
1 = enable FREEZE/RESUME for each VPAT group (A, B, C, D); even lines.  
1 = enable FREEZE/RESUME for each VPAT group (A, B, C, D); odd lines.  
HBLK Mode 1, Repeat Area 0 pattern for odd lines.  
HBLK Mode 1, Repeat Area 1 pattern for odd lines.  
HBLK Mode 1, Repeat Area 2 pattern for odd lines.  
HBLK Mode 1, Repeat Area 3 pattern for odd lines.  
HBLK Mode 1, Repeat Area 4 pattern for odd lines.  
HBLK Mode 1, Repeat Area 5 pattern for odd lines.  
CLPOB Toggle Position 1.  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
HBLKTOGE2  
HBLKTOGE3  
HBLKTOGE4  
HBLKTOGE5  
HBLKTOGE6  
HBLKSTARTA  
HBLKSTARTB  
HBLKSTARTC  
VMASK_EVEN  
VMASK_ODD  
HBLKALT_PAT0  
HBLKALT_PAT1  
HBLKALT_PAT2  
HBLKALT_PAT3  
HBLKALT_PAT4  
HBLKALT_PAT5  
CLPOBTOG1  
CLPOBTOG2  
PBLKTOG1  
0x21  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCP  
[6:4]  
[10:8]  
[14:12]  
[18:16]  
[22:20]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[11:0]  
[23:12]  
[11:0]  
0x22  
0x23  
0x24  
0x25  
0x26  
0x27  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
SCP  
CLPOB Toggle Position 2.  
PBLK Toggle Position 1.  
PBLK Toggle Position 2.  
PBLKTOG2  
HBLK2OFF_A_E  
HBLK2OFF_A_O  
HBLK2OFF_B_E  
HBLK2OFF_B_O  
HBLK2OFF_C_E  
HBLK2OFF_C_O  
HBLKCNT_START  
HCLK Offset A for even lines. Used during HBLK Mode 1.  
HCLK Offset A for odd lines. Used during HBLK Mode 1.  
HCLK Offset B for even lines. Used during HBLK Mode 1.  
HCLK Offset B for odd lines. Used during HBLK Mode 1.  
HCLK Offset C for even lines. Used during HBLK Mode 1.  
HCLK Offset C for odd lines. Used during HBLK Mode 1.  
[23:12]  
[11:0]  
[23:12]  
[12:0]  
Start position for HBLK counter.  
For HBLK operation, HBLKCNT_START should be set equal to the value of  
HBLKSTART; if HBLK interval is not needed, set to 8191.  
[13]  
X
HBLKEND[13]  
MSB for HBLKEND register (V-Sequence Register 0x17, Bits[25:13]).  
Rev. B | Page 110 of 112  
AD9920A  
Table 64. Field Registers (Default Values Are Undefined)  
Default  
Address Data Bits Value  
Update Type Name  
Description  
0x00  
[4:0]  
[9:5]  
[14:10]  
[19:15]  
[24:20]  
[4:0]  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
VD  
SEQ0  
SEQ1  
SEQ2  
SEQ3  
Selected V-sequence for first region in the field.  
Selected V-sequence for second region in the field.  
Selected V-sequence for third region in the field.  
Selected V-sequence for fourth region in the field.  
Selected V-sequence for fifth region in the field.  
Selected V-sequence for sixth region in the field.  
Selected V-sequence for seventh region in the field.  
Selected V-sequence for eighth region in the field.  
Selected V-sequence for ninth region in the field.  
SEQ4  
0x01  
VD  
SEQ5  
SEQ6  
SEQ7  
SEQ8  
[9:5]  
[14:10]  
[19:15]  
[21:20]  
MULT_SWEEP0  
Enables multiplier mode and/or sweep mode for Region 0.  
0 = multiplier off/sweep off.  
1 = multiplier off/sweep on.  
2 = multiplier on/sweep off.  
3 = multiplier on/sweep on.  
[23:22]  
[25:24]  
[12:0]  
[14:13]  
[16:15]  
[18:17]  
[20:19]  
[22:21]  
[24:23]  
[25]  
MULT_SWEEP1  
MULT_SWEEP2  
HDLASTLEN  
MULT_SWEEP3  
MULT_SWEEP4  
MULT_SWEEP5  
MULT_SWEEP6  
MULT_SWEEP7  
MULT_SWEEP8  
HDLASTLEN_13  
SCP0  
Enables multiplier mode and/or sweep mode for Region 1.  
Enables multiplier mode and/or sweep mode for Region 2.  
HD last line length. Line length of last line in the field.  
Enables multiplier mode and/or sweep mode for Region 3.  
Enables multiplier mode and/or sweep mode for Region 4.  
Enables multiplier mode and/or sweep mode for Region 5.  
Enables multiplier mode and/or sweep mode for Region 6.  
Enables multiplier mode and/or sweep mode for Region 7.  
Enables multiplier mode and/or sweep mode for Region 8.  
HD last line length bit [13] when 14-bit H-counter is enabled.  
V-Sequence Change Position 0.  
0x02  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
VD  
0x03  
0x04  
0x05  
0x06  
0x07  
0x08  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[23:0]  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
SCP1  
V-Sequence Change Position 1.  
SCP2  
SCP3  
V-Sequence Change Position 2.  
V-Sequence Change Position 3.  
SCP4  
SCP5  
V-Sequence Change Position 4.  
V-Sequence Change Position 5.  
SCP6  
SCP7  
V-Sequence Change Position 6.  
V-Sequence Change Position 7.  
SCP8  
VDLEN  
V-Sequence Change Position 8.  
VD field length (number of lines in the field).  
SG Active Line 1.  
SGACTLINE1  
SGACTLINE2  
SGMASK  
SG Active Line 2. Set to SG Active Line 1 or maximum if not used.  
Masking of VSG outputs during SG active line.  
CLPOB Mask Region 1 start position. Set to 8191 to disable.  
CLPOB Mask Region 1 end position. Set to 0 to disable.  
CLPOB Mask Region 2 start position. Set to 8191 to disable.  
CLPOB Mask Region 2 end position. Set to 0 to disable.  
CLPOB Mask Region 3 start position. Set to 8191 to disable.  
CLPOB Mask Region 3 end position. Set to 0 to disable.  
0x09  
0x0A  
VD  
VD  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
[25:13]  
[12:0]  
CLPMASKSTART1  
CLPMASKEND1  
CLPMASKSTART2  
CLPMASKEND2  
CLPMASKSTART3  
CLPMASKEND3  
0x0B  
0x0C  
0x0D  
0x0E  
0x0F  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
VD  
PBLKMASKSTART1 PBLK Mask Region 1 start position. Set to 8191 to disable.  
PBLKMASKEND1 PBLK Mask Region 1 end position. Set to 0 to disable.  
PBLKMASKSTART2 PBLK Mask Region 2 start position. Set to 8191 to disable.  
PBLKMASKEND2 PBLK Mask Region 2 end position. Set to 0 to disable.  
PBLKMASKSTART3 PBLK Mask Region 3 start position. Set to 8191 to disable.  
PBLKMASKEND3 PBLK Mask Region 3 end position. Set to 0 to disable.  
[25:13]  
Rev. B | Page 111 of 112  
 
AD9920A  
OUTLINE DIMENSIONS  
8.10  
8.00 SQ  
7.90  
A1 BALL  
CORNER  
11 10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2 1  
A
B
C
D
E
F
BALL A1  
PAD CORNER  
6.50  
BSC SQ  
G
H
J
0.65  
BSC  
K
L
BOTTOM VIEW  
TOP VIEW  
DETAIL A  
*
1.40  
1.31  
1.16  
DETAIL A  
0.91 MIN  
0.25 MIN  
COPLANARITY  
0.10  
0.45  
0.40  
0.35  
SEATING  
PLANE  
BALL DIAMETER  
*
COMPLIANT TO JEDEC STANDARDS MO-225  
WITH THE EXCEPTION TO PACKAGE HEIGHT.  
Figure 118. 105-Ball Chip Scale Package Ball Grid Array [CSP_BGA]  
(BC-105-1)  
Dimensions shown in millimeters  
ORDERING GUIDE  
Model1  
AD9920ABBCZ  
AD9920ABBCZRL  
Temperature Range  
−25°C to +85°C  
−25°C to +85°C  
Package Description  
105-Ball CSP_BGA  
105-Ball CSP_BGA  
Package Option  
BC-105-1  
BC-105-1  
1 Z = RoHS Compliant Part.  
©2009–2010 Analog Devices, Inc. All rights reserved. Trademarks and  
registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.  
D06878-0-6/10(B)  
Rev. B | Page 112 of 112  
 
 

相关型号:

AD9920ABBCZRL

12-Bit CCD Signal Processor with V-Driver and Precision Timing Generator
ADI

AD9923A

CCD Signal Processor with V-Driver and Precision Timing⑩ Generator
ADI

AD9923ABBCZ

CCD Signal Processor with V-Driver and Precision Timing⑩ Generator
ADI

AD9923ABBCZRL

CCD Signal Processor with V-Driver and Precision Timing⑩ Generator
ADI

AD9925

CCD Signal Processor with Vertical Driver and Precision Timing Generator
ADI

AD9925BBCZ

CCD Signal Processor with Vertical Driver and Precision Timing Generator
ADI

AD9925BBCZRL

CCD Signal Processor with Vertical Driver and Precision Timing Generator
ADI

AD9927

14-Bit CCD Signal Processor with V-Driver and Precision TimingTM Generator
ADI

AD9927BBCZ

14-Bit CCD Signal Processor with V-Driver and Precision TimingTM Generator
ADI

AD9927BBCZRL

14-Bit CCD Signal Processor with V-Driver and Precision TimingTM Generator
ADI

AD9928

Dual Channel 14-Bit CCD Signal Processor with V-Driver and Precision Timing Generator
ADI

AD9928BBCZ

Dual-Channel, 14-Bit CCD Signal Processor with V-Driver and Precision Timing Generator
ADI